THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY REPUBLIC OF INDONESIA

DECREE OF THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY

NUMBER: 555.KJ26JM.PEJ1995 on,
GENERAL MINE OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND SAFETY
THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY

Considering:
a) That in conjunction with Government Regulation Number 19 of 1973 regarding regulation on occupational
safety in mining shall become the authority of the Ninister of Nines and Energy;
b) That in line with mining technology advancement, all provisions concerning mine occupational safety
covered in Nind Polity Regalement (NPR) of 1930 Number 3+1 are no longer appropriate and need to be
reviewed;
c) That regulation on Occupational Health and Safety shall be very technical and contain detailed
stipulations which always change in accordance with technological development, therefore it is sufficiently
regulated by a Decree from the Ninister of Nines and Energy.

In View of:
1. Act Number 11 of 1967 (State Gazette of 1967 Number 22, Supplement to State Gazette Number 2831);
2. Act Number' 1 of 1970 (State Gazette of 1970 Number 1, Supplement to State ' Gazette Number 2981);
3. Government Regulation Number 32 of 1969 (State Gazette of 1969 Number 60, Supplement to State
Gazette Number 2916) as already amended by virtue of Government Regulation Number '79 of 1992
(State Gazette of 1992 Number 130, Supplement to State Gazette Number 3510);
+. Government Regulation Number 19 of 1973 (State Gazette of 1973 Number 25, Supplement to State
Gazette Number 3003);
5. Government Regulation Number 27 of 1980 (State Gazette of 1980 Number +7, Supplement to State
Gazette Number 317+); and
6. Presidential Decree Number 96fN of 1993 dated 17 Narch 1993.

DECIDES:
To Stipulate:
DECREE OF THE MINISTER OF MINES AND ENERGY ON OCCUPATIONAL HEALTH AND
SAFETY IN GENERAL MINES










CHAPTER I
GENERAL PROVISIONS

Section One
General

Article 1
Definition
In this Ministerial Decree, the meaning of:
1. Nine Lease Area shall be any workplaces which are directly used for or related to general investigation,
exploration, feasibility study, construction, production or exploitation operation, processing or refinery,
transportation, marketing, and A, B and C classes minerals mining, including overland or underground
infrastructure, either in one area or separate areas.
2. Nining company shall be a person or a business entity authorized to carry out mine operation under a
Lease Agreement.
3. Nine shall be the location for mining activities to obtain minerals.
+. Surface mine shall be a mining method to obtain minerals, of which the activities are conducted on the
ground surface or from above water level.
5. Underground mine shall be a mining method to obtain minerals, of which the activities are conducted
underground.
6. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be a person who heads and is in charge of the implementation of
Occupational Health and Safety Regulation in a mine business activity under his responsibilities.
7. Nine Workers shall be any persons who are directly engaged in mining activities.
8. Nine accident shall be any accidents involving mineworkers or persons entitled to enter the mine area.
9. Director General shall be the Director General of General Nines.
10. Employer shall be the company director.
11. Nine Book shall be a book containing prohibitions, instructions, and guidelines from mine inspectors to
be implemented by Kepala Teknik Tambang.
12. Nine !nspector shall be a staff that inspects the imp1ementation of Occupational Health and Safety in
general mine activities.
13. Project area shall be any areas designated by the Director General or Governor to be utilized for mine
facilities.
1+. Explosives shall be any chemical compounds, mixture, or equipment manufactured, produced and
utilized to produce explosives, which have continuous chemical reaction in its constituents. The
constituents, in this case, include ammunition, nitroglycerin, dynamite, gelatin, detonation cord,
initiation cord, detonator, and ammonium nitrate when mixed with hydrocarbon and other blending
materials.
15. Detonator shall be any materials consisting of explosives fillers used as initiator and in this case,
include electric detonator, none detonator or delayed detonator.
16. Nagazine shall be a building or container, which is technically safe for explosives storage.
17. Blaster shall be a person appointed by the mining company or Kepala Teknik Tambang to carry out
blasting, and the person shall possess Blasting Permit (Kartu !jin Neledakkan).
18. Blasting shall be a work consisting of mixing explosives, preparing primer, charging and stemming blast
holes, lying cords, tying up a blast design, and connecting a blast circuit to a detonator circuit, tester
circuit or blasting machine, establishing danger zone, clearing blast area, testing blast circuit, blasting
the blast holes, handling misfire, and controlling hazardous blasting effect such as fly rock, soil
vibration, noise, and air compression resulting in air blast.
19. Blaster trainee shall be a person authorized by Kepala Teknik Tambang to attend training in blast
operation under a close supervision of a blaster.
20. Explosion is a single explosion or a series of explosions regarded as a part of blasting.
21. Nagazine safety clearance shall be the minimum distance where a magazine must be separated from
any other magazines, occupied buildings, rail roads, public roads and other entities depending on the
types and quantity of explosives stored therein.
22. Detonator-sensitive explosives shall be any explosives capable of exploding through the use of
detonator No.8.
23. Primer-sensitive explosives shall be any explosives capable of exploding only when using primer or
booster with detonator No.8.
2+. Blast agents shall be raw materials, which will become primer-sensitive explosives when mixed with
ceria in substances.
25. Nain Nagazine shall be a building located nearby a mine and utilized for storing explosives used for
blasting.
26. Transit magazine shall be a magazine for temporary storage of explosives, before being transported to
the main magazine.
27. Temporary magazine shall be a magazine utilized for mining activities during the exploration and
preparation stages.
28. Container magazine shall be a magazine in the shape of a container and made of metal plate.
29. Flammable substance shall be any substance, when used, it will ignite, smolder, assist in combustion or
produce flammable vapor when contacting with fire or heat.
30. Flammable gas shall be gas, which is flammable under normal oxygen content.
31. Flash point shall be minimum temperature of vapor produced by a liquid, which is sufficient for yielding
easily flammable vapor and air mixture on the liquid surface.
32. Fire resistance point shall be the time, expressed in minute(s) or hours(s), of a substance that can
retain its original shape and characteristics when in contact with fire.
33. Crane shall be any mechanical, electrical or hydraulic lifting equipment including rails, railroads or other
aids, excluding raise climbers installed at wells.
3+. Tackle shall be lifting equipment consisting of shackle, swivel, hooks, sling, eyebolts, chain, and fitting
as well as any wire safety clips.
35. Workshop shall be a place or workspace for performing service, repair, assembly, installation or testing
of mine equipment and other technical works, which support mine activities.
36. High voltage power shall be any plants with more than 300 volts under normal work condition (250
volts in underground circuit).
37. Bangka drill shall be a type of auger drills equipped with a supporting pipe system and coring drill pipe,
operated by the rotation of work platform fitted to the supporting pipe head. Sampling is done by
percussion impact from the work platform.
38. Hydraulic mine shall be a type of surface mine, which utilized water to excavate and transport minerals
to the washing plant.
39. Earthmoving Equipment shall be mechanical equipment utilized for removing topsoil, overburden and
minerals during clearing, excavation, loading and transferring works. !t includes bulldozer, shovel,
dragline, scraper, and bucket wheel excavator, and excludes haulage vehicles such as dump trucks.
+0. Dredge shall be a ship utilized for mine excavation, including ships used as Support on water surface,
hereinafter referred to as dredge.
+1. Headline shall be a line installed at the bow to berth the dredge.
+2. Breast line shall be a line installed at the dredge's left and right sides to berth the dredge.
+3. Stern line shall be a line installed at the dredge's stern.
++. Spring line shall be a line utilized to berth the dredge, including headline, breast line, and stern line.
+5. Spill anchor shall be a chain anchor, which is installed at the rear middle of a dredge.
+6. Compartment tank shall be a pontoon divided into waterproof compartments.
+7. Pontoon shall be a fully enclosed space, which functions as the dredge's floater.
+8. Safety tank shall be a series of small compartments to protect main compartment from collision or
impact.
+9. Ballast Tank shall be a compartment, which can be filled with water to maintain dredge's balance.
50. !nspection door shall be a door on the dredge's deck, which is used as the entrance for compartment
inspection and maintenance.
51. Circuit breaker shall be a device, which function to stop the current, including automatic and manual
switch.
52. Concentric cable shall be a cable whose outer conductor is wound to its inner conductor insulator.
53. Flexible cable shall be a cable of portable design.
5+. Cable protection metal shall be a cable layer made of iron or steel wire.
55. Tripping shall be an automatic circuit breaker which operates either mechanically or electrically.
56. Rise shall be a shaft of 15 inclinations, excavated from below upward.
57. Winze shall be a shaft of 15 inclinations, excavated from above downward.
58. !n rust shall is a sudden and high velocity !n-flow of water and mud.
59. Emission shall be a sudden release of poisonous or flammable gas from workplace other than
abandoned workplace, to a pan of underground mine and causes air condition within the mine that
exceeds ventilation requirement.
60. Outburst shall be a violent release of gas together with solid materials within a mine.
61. Rock burst shall be a violent outpouring of failure rocks caused by overstrains which generates energy
accumulation, excluding outburst or emission, which is caused by gas pressure.
62. Potential hazard area shall be any underground mine area distancing +5 meters from the ground
surface, abandoned workplaces, water containing or foreseeable water containing areas, or flowing
materials or materials which will flow when wet.
63. Nain fan shall be a fan, which functions to circulate air to all mine openings.
6+. Booster fan shall be a fan, which boosts and adds airflow, and installed at the main or sub airway.
65. Auxiliary fan shall be a fan that functions to circulate air to workplaces, advanced drayage and drift
which are equipped with air channel.
66. Downcast airshaft shall be the main intake airways, starting from a shaft or an edit. When airflow is
divided into two or more workface, the air tunnel shall be called downcast airshaft.
67. Up cast airshaft shall be the main return airways, which end at a shaft or an edit. The outlet for
polluted air coming from some workface to the main air outlet shall' be called up cast airshaft.
68. Transportation system shall be the use of transportation equipment within all or parts of mine (except
those used in a shaft) to transport personnel, materials and minerals.
69. Free-steered vehicles shall be all power driven vehicles, which are not operating, on rails.
70. Rope haulage system shall be a haulage system from vehicle connected to, and propelled by, rope or
cable powered by derrick machine, which is permanently installed at the mine or at the ground, surface
and are either mechanically or gravity propelled.
71. Rise climber shall be all motor-driven equipment or those operating on rail or gear propelled and used
as a scaffold during venial excavation or in an inclined shaft it excludes climber installed as permanent
haulage from one level to another level in a mine.
72. Safety lamps shall be completely protected and sealed lamps that cannot ignite the surrounding air,
which contains flammable gas or dust.
73. Nethane gas shall be any mixture of methane with easily flammable air, which can naturally occur at a
mine.
7+. Flammable Dust shall be dust, which can easily form flammable substance when spread freely in the
air (airborne).
75. ventilation venture shall be a device used to circulate air through a ducting by spraying compressed air
or water. !t includes all injectors and blowers, and excludes injectors and blowers used in methane-gas
drainage system.
76. Automatic methane gas detector shall be equipment acknowledged and used continuously detects the
presence of methane gas, and when set, it will provide audio or visual warnings when the methane gas
reaches certain level concentration.
77. Nethane gas monitoring system shall be a system acknowledged and used to continuously detect and
record the presence of explosive gas. The recorder shall be stationed on the ground surface or other
places approved by the Nine !nspector.
78. Drill hole shall be any holes drilled and intended to flow explosive gas from coal seams through a
methane gas drainage system.
79. Nethane gas drainage shall be an activity to collect methane gas in a mine prior to diluting the gas
with air and expelling it out of the mine.
80. Nethane gas drainage system shall be the system of draining methane gas except for draining the gas
accumulated on "Road Side Pack" using one pipe.
81. Calorimeter. Room shall be a place on the mine surface where explosive gas or its heat content is
monitored.
82. Armored flexible conveyor shall be armored flexible conveyor which is used convey coal from drum
sheared-excavated working face.
83. Bar shall be a horizontal girder or support.
8+. Prop shall include sliding support and chained support (penyangga gandeng).
85. Powered support shall be a support that operates with hydraulic or pneumatic.
86. Traveling road shall be any roads used for walking from and to the workface including secondary exit
from the mine.
87. Tunnel shall be any roads within the mine, including advanced diverge, horizontal tunnel, tunnels
between two pillars or roads at a room and pillar mining or haulage roads.
88. Workface shall be a space between excavation line and the nearest pillar series when the pillars are
removed systematically, and or space between excavation line and lines parallel with 3,5 from mined
area when the pillars are removed unsystematically.

Article 2
Scope
1. This ministerial decree shall be applicable to all mine activities within Nine Authorization, Work Contract,
Work Agreement areas or other areas determined as project area by the Director General or Governor,
in accordance with his authority.
2. The Chief Nine. !nspector can give exemption against the provisions herein when requested by the
employer or the Chief Nine !nspector.

Section Two
Prohibition to Enter a Mine Area
Article 3
1. !t is prohibited to be within a mine area, except for those working therein or authorized.
2. Those who are authorized to enter a mining area as referred to in paragraph (1) shall be accompanied
by Kepala Teknik Tambang or the appointed person in order to know the condition of the area he is
visiting.
3. !f Kepala Teknik Tambang grants a right to use a particular mine road as a public road, the user's safety
shall be his responsibility.

Section Three
Employer

Article 4
Obligation
1. The employer can only commence mine operation after giving a written notification to the Chief Nine
!nspector.
2. The employer shall send a written notification to the Chief Nine !nspector within two weeks after
performing the following activities:
a. Commencing exploration, opening mine, new shaft or tunnel within a coal seam at an underground
mine;
b. Commencing the excavation of new shaft or exit for each underground mine;
c. Stopping mine activity or leaving a surface each or mine drift or tunnel, shaft or exit from an
underground mine, counted 12 months from the last mining activity, except when the workplace has
been abandoned.
3. The employer shall provide all equipment, gears, personal protection equipment, facilities, and budget
needed for the implementation of this decree.
+. The employer shall provide the free-of-charge personal protection equipment needed in accordance with
natures, characteristics, and hazards of all works undertaking and for any person entering the mine area.
5. Based on the Chief Nine !nspector's consideration, the employer shall provide the mine inspector with
decent accommodation nearby the amine area during his duty.
6. The employer shall provide full support to The Nine !nspector in performing his duty.
7. The employer shall stop mining activities if Kepala Teknik Tambang or the appointed staff is not available
at the mine area.

Article 5
Appointment of Kepala Teknik Tambang
1. Exploration and exploitation can only be commenced after the holder of the mine authority appoints a
Kepala Teknik Tambang.
2. The employer shall appoint the Chief Nine !nspector shall recognize a Kepala Teknik Tambang and the
appointment.
3. The employer can apply to the Chief Nine !nspector to appoint more than one Kepala Teknik Tambang if
deemed necessary or based on a certain consideration from the Chief Nine !nspector.
+. The employer can apply to the Chief Nine !nspector to appoint more than one Deputy Kepala Teknik
Tambang when regarded necessary or based on certain consideration from the Chief Nine !nspector.
5. The implementation of the provisions referred to in paragraphs (3) and (+) shall be decided by the Chief
Nine !nspector.
6. The Chief Nine !nspector can forward a letter of notification to the Kepala Teknik Tambang when
requested.

Article 6
Qualification of Kepala Teknik Tambang
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be classified into the following four (+) categories:
a. Class !!! B;
b. Class !!! A;
c. Class !!; and
d. Class !
Article 7
Kepala Teknik Tambang Class III B
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall meet the following requirements:
a. Nining System: hydraulic mine, drill mine, single-bench surface mine without explosives, dredge mine
with suction pump, manual surface mine, exploration stage of a non-tunnel mine and construction stage
of a surface mine.
b. Nining Company: !ndividual, Cooperatives, and National Private Companies.
c. Qualifications:
1) Graduate of Technical High School majoring in Nining, Nechanical or Electrical Engineering,
certificate on Occupational Health and Safety course, and minimum four years work experience in
mining industry.
2) BachelorfD !!! andfor Sarjana (S1 Degree), certificate on Occupational Health and Safety course, and
at least two years work experience in mining industry.

Article S
Kepala Teknik Tambang Class III A
Kepala Teknik Tambang Class !!! A shall meet the following requirements:
a. Nining System: Dredge with bucket, multiple-benches surface mine, quarry, surface mine with production
scale less than 1000 tonsfdays or exploration stage of tunnel mine and underground mine construction.
b. Nine Company: National Private Company and State-Owned Company (BUNN).
c. Qualifications:
1) Graduate of Technical High School majoring in Nining, Nechanical or Electrical Engineering
Department, certificate on Occupational Health and Safety course, Blaster Class !! for Nining Using
Explosives course, Dredge Course or Kepala Teknik Tambang course, and at least six years work
experience in mining industry.
2) BachelorfD !!! andfor Sarjana S1 (S1 Degree), certificate on Occupational Health and Safety course,
Blaster Class !! for Nining Using Explosives course, Dredge Course or Kepala Teknik Tambang course,
and at least three years work experience in mining industry.
3) At least five years experience as a Kepala Teknik Tambang Class !!! B.

Article 9
Kepala Teknik Tambang Class II
Kepala Teknik Tambang Class !! shall meet the following requirements:
1. Nining System: surface mine with production scale of more than 1000 tonsfday and underground ore
mine;
2. Nining Company: State-Owned Company (BUNN), Work Contract, and National Private Company.
3. Qualifications:
a. !ndonesian citizen, with one of the following requirements:
1) BachelorfD !!! with certificate of Kepala Teknik Tambang course and at least seven years work
experience in surface or underground mine, or
2) Sarjana (S1 Degree) with certificate of Kepala Teknik Tambang course and at least five years
work experience in mining industry, or
3) At least ten years experience as a Nine !nspector.
+) Possess certificate of Nine Occupational Health and Safety course or overseas training, which
Kepala Teknik Tambang, has accredited, and ten years work experience in mining industry.
b. Expatriate (expert), with one of the following requirements:
1) Possessing a mine manager certificate which has been accredited by Accreditation Committee for
Kepala Teknik Tambang, or
2) Preparing and presenting a paper on topics selected by the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 10
Kepala Teknik Tambang Class I
Kepala Teknik Tambang Class ! shall meet the following requirements:
1. Nining system: underground coal mine and underground ore mine with ore production scale of more than
1000 tonsfday.
2. Qualifications:
a. !ndonesian citizen, with one of the following requirements:
1) BachelorfD !!! or Sarjana (S1 Degree) with certificate of Kepala Teknik Tambang course, and at
least ten years work experience in underground coal or ore mine.
2) At least 15 years experience as a Nine !nspector.
3) Five years experience as a Kepala Teknik Tambang Class !!.
b. Expatriate (expert), with one of the following requirements:
1) Possessing mine manager certificate which has been accredited by an Accreditation Committee
for Kepala Teknik Tambang.
2) Preparing and presenting a paper on topics selected by the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 11
Operational Supervisor
1. !n performing his duty and function on Occupational Health and Safety in mining, mechanical and
electrical trades and in operating their equipment, the Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be assisted by staff
in charge of the organization unit at the company.
2. !n the event that the employer has not yet appointed the staff referred to in paragraph (1), the Kepala
Teknik Tambang can appoint the intended staff.
3. The staff referred to in paragraphs (1) and (2), in performing his task, shall be called as Operational
Supervisor or Technical Supervisor and reports to the Kepala Teknik Tambang.

Article 12
Operational Supervisor's Obligations
Operational supervisor is obligated to:
a. Be responsible for the safety of all mine workers under his supervision to Kepala Teknik Tambang;
b. Conduct inspection, investigation and assessment;
c. Be responsible for all assigned personnel's health, safety and welfare.
d. Prepare and sign investigation, inspection and assessment reports.

Article 13
Technical Supervisor's Obligations
Technical supervisor is obligated to:
a. Be responsible for the safety of installation, operation and repair of all equipment under his supervision to
the Kepala Teknik Tambang;
b. Supervise and inspect all mechanical and electrical plants under his supervision;
c. Ensure that investigation, inspection and assessment of mechanical, electrical and equipment are always
conducted;
d. Prepare and sign investigation, inspection and assessment reports;
e. Conduct investigation and assessment to all machinery and equipment, including their pre-
commencement, post-installation, reinstallation and repair; and
f. Plan and emphasize the implementation of the planned maintenance schedules of mine machinery,
haulage vehicles, road construction equipment, and other machinery.

Article 14
Mine Inspection
1. !n order to ensure a safe work condition, the appointed Kepala Teknik Tambang or the appointed staff
shall:
a. At least once for each shift, inspect workplaces where a mine worker works, and each road or track
used during the shift;
b. !n each shift, clear the blast area prior to a blast operation;
c. On each workday, inspect entrances and stairways used on the day;
d. !nspect all working faces, work fronts, beams, and work slopes and repair works, where necessary;
e. !nspect blast preparation and the clearing of vehicles and equipment used in the blast area;
f. !nspect haulage and transport equipment;
g. !nspect mine roads;
h. Nachinery guards; and
i. Hazardous places.
2. During the inspections referred to in paragraph (1), necessary actions shall be taken against unsafe
condition found.

Article 15
For an effective supervision and inspection of mine works, the works should be divided into work units and
there has to be someone in charge of each of them.

Article 16
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall determine forms and dates of inspection reports for machinery, electrical
and its equipment.
2. The reports referred to in paragraph (1) shall be handed to the Kepala Teknik Tambang.

Section Four
Surveyor and Mine Plan
Article 17
1. Only holder of surveyor certificate is eligible to become a mine surveyor.
2. For underground mine, the surveyor referred to in paragraph (1) shall possess underground mine
experience and be endorsed by the Nine !nspector.

Article 1S
Mine Surveyor's Obligations
1. Nine surveyor shall be responsible for determining or indicating excavation strike and direction in
accordance with the plan.
2. Nine surveyor shall immediately report to personnel in charge of excavation work when the work
approaches (not less than 50 meters to) potential hazardous area, such as water pockets, hazardous gas,
rock burst, and land surface or support which can be a hazard to the excavation work.
3. As long as it complies with the provisions herein, the mine surveyor shall not be responsible for the
accuracy of measurements prepared by his preceding surveyor or measurement of authorized as the
correction of other surveyor's work. The incumbent surveyor, however, shall:
a. Take action to correct each plan, drawing and plain map prepared by other mine surveyors or those
under his supervision; and
b. Contact Kepala Teknik Tambang should he be doubtful on the accuracy of any map, drawing or plain
map which was not prepared by or under the supervision of him but will possibly arise impacts on
mine activities and mine workers' safety.

Article 19
Plan
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall prepare;
a. Site plan showing mine boundaries, all surface works, buildings, power circuits, overland roads, train
rails, lakes, rivers, tailing ponds, adits, shafts and other information required by the Chief Nine !nspector;
while for underground work, the plan should show shafts, tunnels, dams, and air or water ventilation;
b. Open cut mine plan showing surface site plan, which covers mine location and surface infrastructure.
Underground mine plan should show horizontal seam cross sections, including underground works,
openings, shafts, underground infrastructure, and other information. The plan scale shall be in
accordance with the requirement from the Chief Nine !nspector, and the plan shall show the last six-
month condition.
c. Geological plan showing soil seam boundaries and alluvial deposits within the area; and
d. Nine plan showing main roads and exits from each mine to the surface, phone box and other
communication facilities, either on the surface or underground, at visible location.

Section Five
Mine Book
Article 20
Nine Book Provisions:
1. Any mining industry, which has appointed a Kepala Teknik Tambang, shall possess a Nine Book, whose
size and forms shall comply with the requirements of the Chief Nine !nspector.
2. The Nine Book referred to in paragraph (1) shall be authorized by the Nine !nspector by putting number
and signature on every single page.

Article 21
Mine Book Records
1. The Nine !nspector himself shall record all breaches against the provisions herein, including special
provisions such as instructions, prohibitions and directives.
2. Without prejudice to the provisions referred to in paragraph (1), all notifications from the Chief Nine
!nspector to the Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be recorded in the Nine Book and the copies as per
original are signed.
3. The provisions referred to in paragraph (1) and (2) shall be recorded by the Kepala Teknik Tambang on
the left pages of the Nine Book.

Section Six
Guidelines on Mine Occupational Health and Safety

Article 23
Occupational health and Safety Section
The Chief Nine !nspector may, in any mine activities and upon considering the number of workers, and scope
and natures of work, obligate the mining company to establish an organization unit to observe Occupational
Health and Safety under the supervision of Kepala Teknik Tambang.

Article 24
Duties of Occupational Health and Safety Section
Occupational Health and Safety Section has the following duties:
a. Collect data and record details of any accidents or hazardous events, and the incident prior to, and
causes, analysis, and prevention of the accident;
b. Collect data on areas and activities which need closer supervision in order to provide suggestion to the
Kepala Teknik Tambang concerning mining methods, work specifications, mine equipment, and the use of
detectors and personal protection equipment;
c. Provide information and guidelines on Occupational health and Safety to all mine workers through
meetings, lectures, discussions, film presentations, publications, etc;
d. Establish Nine Rescue Team, when necessary, and train the members;
e. Prepare accidents statistics; and
f. Perform evaluation on Occupational Health and Safety.



Article 25
Occupational Health and Safety Committee
!n order to observe the duties referred to in article 23, Occupational Health and Safety Section can establish a
work group (committee) at each structural level, with the following duties:
a. Perform regular inspections on every Occupational Health and Safety aspects and all related matters in
amine and propose action to cope with them;
b. Arrange a necessary integrated inspection to workplaces in the mine area.

Section Seven
Mine Workers
Article 26
Requirements
1. Nine workers shall satisfy requirements to fit the natures of works to be performed and be physically and
mentally healthy.
2. Women mineworkers are prohibited to work in an underground mine, except for those performing
medical works or conducting study or research and having recommendation from the Kepala Teknik
Tambang.
3. !t is prohibited to assign a mineworker to work alone at an isolated area and where unexpected hazard
might occur (except where direct communication means with other nearby mine workers are available).
+. !t is prohibited to assign an ill miner or those who, for any reasons, are unable to perform their duties
normally.
5. !f, based on the investigation of Nine !nspector, the Kepala Teknik Tambang and the Kepala Bagian
Tambang for Underground Nine, a mineworker violates deliberately this Ninisterial Decree; hefshe shall
be subjected to a sanction in accordance with the prevailing regulations.

Article 27
Medical Examination
1. Nine workers shall be entitled to have medical examination, which is the responsibility of the company.
2. Nine workers shall undergo regular medical examination by an authorized physician.
3. Underground mine workers shall undergo medical examination at least twice a year.
+. Nineworkers working in an area, which may endanger their lungs, shall undergo a special medical
examination.
5. The Chief Nine !nspector, based on the prevailing regulations can decide the frequency of medical
examination by an authorized physician for mine workers handling dangerous substance.

Article 2S
Education and Training
1. The Kepala Teknik Tambang is obligated to provide education and training to new mine workers, mine
workers assigned to new works on hazard handling exercise annual refreshing training or other education
and training determined by the Chief Nine !nspector.
2. The Kepala Teknik Tambang may, individually or in cooperation with government institutions and other
legal agencies, hold educations and training referred to in paragraph (1), which should match the types
of mining activities.
3. The education and training referred to in paragraph (1) shall be previously approved by the Chief Nine
!nspector.


Article 29
1. Education and training programs referred to in article 28 shall at least cover the following topics:
a. Nine worker's duties;
b. Supervisor's authorities and responsibilities;
c. Work environment induction;
d. Personal evacuation, emergency rescue, fire alarms and fire fighting;
e. Health and safety aspects of the assigned duties;
f. Hazard identification and prevention;
g. Electrical and mechanical hazards;
h. First aids;
i. Noise, dust and heat hazards, and protective measures against them.
2. For underground mine, education and training programs referred to in paragraph (1) shall also cover the
following additional topics:
a. Safe underground mine procedures;
b. Nine lighting system operation and maintenance;
c. Fundamentals of ventilation;
d. Regulation on and principles of supporting;
e. Evacuation procedures at a mine in case of emergency;
f. The use of Personal Protective Equipment;
g. Flammable and noxious gas hazards and detection.
3. The topics of education and training program other than those referred to in paragraph (1) shall be in
accordance with the mining activities and types of works.

Article 30
1. The Kepala Teknik Tambang is obligated to provide supervisors with education and training on the
following topics:
a. Occupational health and safety regulations;
b. Work safety management;
c. Work safety regulation and safe work;
d. Hazard identification and prevention;
e. Emergency and rescue procedures;
f. Personal rescue and breathing apparatus;
g. Nechanical and electrical hazards;
h. Fire prevention and fire fighting;
i. First aids; and
j. Environmental impacts of mine operations.
2. For underground mine supervisor, the program shall also cover, in addition to the topics stated in
paragraph (1), the following topics:
a. Safe work;
b. Personal lamp (helmet lamp) use and maintenance;
c. Fundamentals of ventilation;
d. Regulation on and principles of supporting;
e. Emergency evacuation;
f. The use of Personal Protective Equipment; and
g. Flammable and noxious gas hazards and detection.

Article 31
Mine Workers Attendance List
1. Working hours and workplace of every mineworker shall be recorded in an attendance list or any other
means.
2. The recording referred to in paragraph (1) shall be performed at the mine office or other places nearby
the mine area.

Article 32
Obligations
1. Nine workers shall comply with Occupational Health and Safety Regulation.
2. Nine workers shall be obligated to perform works safely.
3. Nine workers on duty are obligated to: a. pay attention to the safety of his own and others who might
suffer from his misconduct; b. immediately take action andfor contact supervisor upon noticing a
potential hazards situation.
+. Upon noticing or hearing any violation of the duties referred to in paragraph (3), the mine worker shall be
obligated to immediately report it to the line supervisors on duty.
5. !n performing their duties, the mineworkers shall be obligated to wear and take care of Personal
Protective Equipment.
6. Provide correct information when interviewed by the Nine !nspector or the Kepala Teknik Tambang.
7. The Nineworkers reserve the right to reject a work assigned by his supervisor if the work does not
comply with the Occupational Health and Safety Regulations.

Article 33
Hazard Prevention
Every mineworker shall be obligated to:
a. Pay attention to the health and safety of his own and others who might suffer from his misconduct or
absence from the workplace;
b. Comply with the instructions for the sake of his or others' safety and health;
c. Wear personal protective equipment properly;
d. !mmediately report to his immediate supervisor of potential hazard situation which he considers to be out
of control; and
e. Report any occupational accidents or injuries.

Article 34
1. A mine worker who notices an immediate hazard which can affect other mine workers shall warn them of
the hazard.
2. All mine shall immediately evacuate after receiving the warning.
3. The incumbent shift leader shall inform the next shift leader of any hazard in writing.

Section Eight
Mine Facilities

Article 35
Mine Office
1. A mine office shall be built at or nearby the mine area or at a part of regular mining area.
2. The mine office referred to in paragraph (1) shall be provided with maps related to general mines.
3. At or near the mine office, an announcement board shall be installed to attach:
a. Notices that the regulation requires them to be put; and
b. Notices issued by the Nine !nspector.

Article 36
Accommodation
Remote mine area shall be provided with decent and hygienic accommodation.


Section Nine
First Aids

Article 37
Medical and First Aids
1. At or nearby the mine office, there shall be a First Aids Room, which is equipped with all necessary
equipment.
2. The First Aids room referred to in paragraph (1) shall be: a. sufficiently spacious; b. easily accessible; c.
easy for stretcher access; d. sufficiently illuminated and ventilated; e. separated from other buildings; f.
used for First Aids purpose only.
3. Based on a certain consideration, the Chief Nine !nspector can give a written approval as deviation of the
provisions in paragraph (2).
+. An Ambulance and special vehicle shall be provided and available for use at anytime.

Article 3S
The Head of First Aids Room
1. A nurse or a physician shall head First Aids room or at least by a person possessing First Aids certificate.
2. The head of First Aids room must be available to work all the time. !f hefshe is absent from work, a
competent acting staff shall be appointed.

Section Ten
Mine Accident and Hazardous Events

Article 39
Nine accident shall meet the following five (5) criteria:
a. !t really occurs;
b. !t results in injury to mine workers or persons authorized by the Kepala Teknik Tambang to enter the
mine area;
c. !t is due to consequence of mine activities;
d. !t occurs during the casualty's working hours or at anytime for those authorized by Kepala Teknik
Tambang to enter the mine area.
e. !t occurs within the mine or project area.

Article 40
Mine Injury Classification
!njuries caused by a mine accident shall be recorded, and they are categorized as follows:
1. Minor Injury
Nine injury, which causes a mineworker unable to perform his original duties for more than 1 (one) day
but less than 3 (three) weeks, including Sundays and holidays;
2. Serious Injury
1) Nine injury which causes the casualty unable to perform his original duties for more than 3 (three)
weeks, including Sundays and holidays;
2) Nine injury which causes the casualty permanently disabled and is unable to perform his original
duties;
3) Nine injuries which do not depend upon the length of time of the casualty's disability to perform his
original duties, but on the types of injuries, such as:
a. Skull, backbone, hip, lower arm, upper arm, tight or leg fractures;
b. !nternal bleeding, or suffocation;
c. Severe injury or laceration which may cause invalidity;
d. Dislocation for the first time.
3. Fatality
Nine accident, which causes death within 2+ hours as from the occurrence of the accident.
Article 41
Reporting Procedures
1. Regardless the seriousness of injury, the casualty shall be reported or taken to the First Aids room or
medical center for examination and medication before leaving the work.
2. The report of accident and medication referred to in paragraph (1) shall be recorded in a special book.
3. !f a major or fatal accident occurs, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall report it immediately to the Chief Nine
!nspector.

Article 42
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang or the appointed staff within no longer than 2 x 2+ hours following the accident
shall investigate the mine accident, and its result shall be recorded in the accident list report.
2. The mine accident shall be recorded in a form and forwarded to the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 43
Notice of Hazards
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang to the Chief Nine !nspector shall immediately report life threatening or
production impeding hazards.
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall immediately take safe actions against hazard referred to in paragraph (1).

Article 44
Hazards Specifications
Hazards at an open cut mine, dredge and drilling activity can be:
a. A collapse, turning upside down or failure of lifting machine when lifting a load;
b. Explosion, damage or break of pressurized cylinder, where the pressure inside the cylinder is bigger or
smaller than the ambient air pressure;
c. Short circuit or current overload caused by fire or explosion which ceases the activities for more than 2+
hours;
d. A sudden and out-of-control explosion or fire in a refinery or workshop, or in a place which ceases normal
activities at those places for more than 2+ hours, where the explosion or fire is caused by the burning of
mixture of end and by product;
e. A sudden and out-of-control leakage of one ton or more hazardous substances, such as flammable or
noxious gas or liquid from a refinery or piping;
f. A collapse of a part or a whole of suspended platform of more than 5 meter height from the floor;
g. A collapse of a building;
h. Premature blast or unintentional explosion of explosives;
i. Broken pipes causing injury or severe property damage;
j. An accident caused by an upside down vehicle which is transporting hazardous substances on production
or mine road;
k. An accident caused by the failure of breathing apparatus which restricts the users' respiration and causes
suffocation;
l. An accident caused by contact between a building or an equipment and annulated high voltage aerial
cable;
m. Any accidents caused by collision between locomotive and other vehicles;
n. A collapse of coal bunker;
o. Passenger-loaded water vehicles, barge or mine dredge being drowned or turned upside down.
p. An incident where a person get injured as a result of an explosion or blasting which requires the casualty
to be treated with First Aids or medication.
q. An incident where, due to a blast operation, a material is thrown out of blast danger zone and hit or,
possibly, put someone in risk.
r. A subsiding pile or a fire or other incident, which indicates an unstable or unsafe condition.

Article 45
Hazardous events related to underground mine are:
a. Underground gas combustion;
b. Underground fire;
c. Surface fire which endangers the operation of derrick or hoisting machinery installed at a shaft, or the
operation of a mechanically-driven equipment for underground ventilation;
d. The outburst of gas and coal or other solid materials into the workplace, except those intentional
outburst;
e. Broken rope, chain, joint, sling, guide rope or other devices which are related to personnel transportation
through a shaft or an exit;
f. Broken rope, chain, joint, sling, guide rope or other devices which are related to underground personnel
transportation, or broken belt or hanging rope of a conveyor, or other devices related to conveyor, when
transporting personnel;
g. A passenger-loaded vehicle being upside down;
h. Failure of ventilation equipment, except during the planned maintenance schedule, which results in an
excessive ventilation inadequacy for more than 30 minutes in amine which uses safety lamps, or for 2
hours in other mine types (auxiliary compressor is not inclusive in this provision);
i. Collapse of hoisting mast andfor hoisting engine chamber and compressor chamber or its bunker;
j. Breathing apparatus (BfA):
1) A malfunction of breathing apparatus or other similar device or personal safety equipment.
2) Soon after or when wearing breathing apparatus or personal safety equipment in a mine, the user
needs First Aids or is unhealthy.
k. Any accident caused by the use of explosive and other mine accidents, where someone gets injured due
to explosion or blast of explosives or accessories, which makes someone in need of First Aids or on-site
medication;
l. Leakage of:
1) Flammable gas or liquid from a mined area; or
2) Other substances, which flow during the rain.
m. Accident caused by a sudden stop of non-operating, reversing or track-testing locomotive in an
underground mine, and not by the use of safety device or brake;
n. Accident requiring the use of all evacuation equipment during emergency and compliance with specified
emergency evacuation rules in accordance with requirements on evacuation provisions, except for
rehearsal; and
o. The collapse of natural supports or support system, which halts the normal works for more than 2+
hours.

Article 46
Mine Accident and Hazards Investigation
1. For investigation purposes, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall not be allowed to alter the scene and repair
damaged equipment, which involves in the accident or hazard events, except for aids purpose.
2. !f deemed necessary for the work progress, the situation at the scene or a hazard event can only be
altered when approved by the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 47
Mine Accident and Hazards Investigation
1. Nine accident statistics shall be prepared annually based on the frequency and severity of the accident
and are counted as follows:
a. The number of casualties divided by man-hours x 1.000.000, and
b. Lost time injury divided by man-hours x 1.000.000.
2. Accident statistics referred to in paragraph (1) shall be sent by Kepala Teknik Tambang to the Chief Nine
!nspector at the latest of 1 month after the of each calendar year.



Section Eleven
Health

Article 4S
Changing Room
1. At certain works and based on health consideration, mine workers should change their working attire and
clean their body before leaving the workplace.
2. As the implementation of the provision referred to in paragraph (1), the Nining CompanyfKepala Teknik
Tambang shall provide changing and cleaning room, which is always kept clean.

Article 49
Water Supply
1. Water for laundry and body cleaning purposes shall be clean, and wastewater should be channeled to a
treatment plant.
2. Hygienic potable water shall always be available for mine workers for free during working hours.
3. Potable water pot shall always be clean and equipped with proper automatic cap.

Article 50
Toilet
Any mines shall be provided with hygienic toilet.

Article 51
Alcoholic Beverages
1. !t is forbidden to drink alcoholic beverages during working hours.
2. Niner workers under alcohol influence shall not work.



















CHAPTER II
EXPLOSIVES AND BLASTING

Section One
Magazine

Article 52
Magazine Permits
1. Explosive used for mining activity shall only be stored in a magazine having a permit with a certain
capacity set forth by the Chief Nine !nspector in writing. !f the magazine is located out of the mine area
and to be used for mining activity, a written approval from the Chief Nine !nspector shall be obtained.
2. The Chief Nine !nspector shall approve explosives used for other purposes.
3. Permit application for magazine referred to in paragraph (1) shall enclose:
a. A 1:100 scale construction drawing of the magazine, showing top and side views and other necessary
points, in accordance with maximum capacity of the magazine applied for;
b. A 1:5000 scale location drawing of the magazine, showing its safety clearance.
+. Permit application for underground magazine shall be provided with a map and specification showing the
magazine construction and location.
5. Detonator shall be stored separately from explosives. Detonator magazine shall be of the same
construction as explosives magazine.
6. The Chief Nine !nspector shall determine application requirements for explosives magazine.
7. Expiry dates for explosives magazine shall be:
a. Two (2) years for temporary magazine;
b. Five (5) years for transit magazine; and
c. Five (5) years for permanent magazine.
8. The Chief Nine !nspector can revoke the permit of a magazine, which no longer fulfills the requirements.
9. !f the mine activity ceases or is suspended for more than three months, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall
report to the Chief Nine !nspector, and the magazine shall remain under guard.

Article 53
General Provisions on Explosives Magazine
1. Ground level explosives magazine shall conform with the requirements for safe clearance to environment.
2. !f two more magazines ore stationed at one location, each magazine should be within the minimum
safety clearance to the other.
3. !f the clearance of two or more magazines fails to fulfill the requirements referred to in paragraph (1)
shall be applicable to the total number of explosives stored in the said magazine compound.

Article 54
Magazine Security
1. Every magazine shall be provided with:
a. A thermometer placed in a storage chamber;
b. No Smoking" and Authorized Personnel Only" signs;
c. One entrance way; and
d. Fire extinguishers in easily accessible locations outside the magazine.
2. The surrounding of the magazine compound shall be provided with lighting and under all-round clock
guard by reliable security guards. Guardhouse shall be located outside the magazine and ideal for
guarding the magazine compound.
3. Fences provided with a lockable gate shall surround magazine compound.
+. Gas-tight flashlight shall be used when entering the magazine.
5. !t is forbidden to wear iron-spiked shoes and bring matches or other incendiary devices into the
magazine.
6. Detonator-sensitive explosives magazine shall be surrounded by bund of 2 (two) meter height and 1
(one) meter width; and if the entrance gate is in direct opposition with the magazine's door, the
magazine's door shall be provided with bund so that entrance into the magazine is from the side only.
7. !f the explosive magazine is built on an excavated compact ground, the bund shall comply with the
requirements as referred to in paragraph (6).
8. !n addition to the requirements referred to in paragraph (1), the following requirements shall also apply
to Ammonium Nitrate and ANFO magazine:
a. A less than 5.000 kg capacity magazine shall be provided with automatic water sprinkler; and
b. A more than 5.000 kg capacity magazine shall be provided with fire hydrant outside the building,
which is connected to a pressurized water source.

Section Two
Requirements of Surface Magazine
Article 55
Layout
1. A building magazine which is used for storing detonator-sensitive explosive shall consist of two separate
rooms as follows:
a. Rear room for storing explosives; and
b. Front room for receiving and issuing explosives.
2. The position of both rear and front rooms' doors shall not be directly opposite to each other, and shall be
provided with sturdy locks.
3. Nagazine for other explosives may consist of only one room, but it shall be provided with a special space
for checking and counting explosives, which are located close to, but not coupled with the magazine.

Article 56
Temporary Magazine
1. Detonator-sensitive magazine:
a. A building magazine shall be:
1) Nade of non combustible materials;
2) Provided with the lightest possible roofs;
3) Provided with solid walls;
+) Provided with top and bottom ventilation;
5) Provided with only one entrance door;
6) Provided with lightning arrester of less than 5 Ohms ground resistance;
7) Fire free within 30 meter radius;
8) Constructed from a non-spark igniting floor materials; and
9) Free from an exposed iron up to three meters high from the floor.
b. Container magazine shall be:
1) Nade of a minimum of 3 mm thick metal plate;
2) Provided with top and bottom ventilation;
3) Lined with wood at its inner surface;
+) Constructed in such a way that no rainwater can enter;
5) Provided with only one entrance door; and
6) Provided with lightning arrester of less than 5-Ohm ground resistance.
c. The capacity of temporary magazine shall not be more than:
1) +.000 kg for building magazine; and
2) 2.000 kg for container magazine.
2. Primer-sensitive explosives:
a. Building magazine shall satisfy the requirements referred to in paragraph (1), except for letter a point
3, and its capacity shall not be more than 10.000 kg; and
b. A container magazine shall satisfy the requirements referred to in paragraph (1), except for letter b
point 3, and its capacity shall not be more than 5.000 kg.
3. Blast agents magazine:
a. A building magazine shall satisfy the requirements referred to in paragraph (1) letter a, except for
point 3, and its capacity shall not be more than 10.000 kg; and
b. Container magazine shall satisfy requirements referred to in paragraph (1) letter b, except for point
3, and its capacity shall not be more than10.000 kg.

Article 57
Transit Magazine
1. Detonator-sensitive explosives may not be stored in a transit magazine, and shall be directly stored in the
permanent magazine.
2. Primer-sensitive explosive magazine:
a. A building magazine shall satisfy the requirements referred to in article 56 paragraph (1), except for
letter (a) points 8, and its capacity shall not be more than 500.000 kg, and
b. Container magazine shall satisfy the requirements referred to in paragraph (1), except for letter (b)
points 3,
3. Blast agents magazine:
a. A building magazine shall satisfy the requirements referred to in article 56 paragraph (1), except for
letter (a) points 3 and 8, and
b. A container or tank magazine may only be stationed at locations permitted by the Chief Nine
!nspector, and the blast agents shall remain ! the original bags. The capacity of each container or
tank shall not be more than 20.000 kg, and the capacity of each storage place shall not be more than
2.000.000 kg.
+. A building magazine for blast agents shall satisfy the requirements referred to in article 56 paragraph (1),
except for letter (a) points 3 and 8, with the following additional requirements:
a. (i) The floor shall not be made of wood or other materials which absorb melted Ammonium nitrate;
(ii) The magazine and the surrounding area must be dry; and
(iii) The interior of the magazine and the pallet shall not be made of galvanized iron, zinc, copper or
lead;
b. The magazine capacity shall not be more than 2.000.000 kg.

Article 5S
Permanent Magazine
1. Detonator-sensitive explosives magazine shall fulfill the requirements referred to in article 56 paragraph
(1) letter (a), and its capacity shall not be more than 150.000 kg.
2. Primer-sensitive explosives magazine shall fulfill the requirements referred to in article 56 paragraph (1)
letter a, and its capacity shall not be more than 500.000 kg.
3. Blast agents magazine:
a. A building magazine shall satisfy the requirements referred to in article 56 paragraph (1), except for
letter (a) point 3, and its capacity shall not be more than 500.000 kg.
b. A tank magazine shall fulfill the following requirements:
1) The tank shall not be made e.g. galvanized copper, lead, zinc, or iron;
2) There shall be an operator's inspection hole and platform at the top;
3) Outlet pipe shall be located at the bottom of the tank;
+) There shall be an excessive pressure relief valve at the top.
c. A container magazine shall fulfill the requirements referred to in article 56 paragraphs (1), except for
letter b, point 3.

Article 59
Safety Clearance
1. Safety clearance of a detonator-sensitive explosive magazine shall be as follows:
a. Every 1.000 No. 8 detonators are equivalent to 1 kg of detonator-sensitive explosives. Those of
greater power than No. 8 detonator shall comply with the manufacturer's specification.
b. Every length of 330 meters with 50-60 grain initiation cord is equivalent to + detonator-sensitive
explosives.
2. Safety clearance referred to in article 53 paragraph (1), article 56 paragraph (1) and article 58 paragraph
(1) shall be as follows:
3. Nagazine clearance referred to in article 53 paragraph (2), article 56 paragraph (2) and (3), article 57
paragraph (2) end (3), and article 58 paragraph (2) and (3) shall be as follows:
+. Nagazine clearance referred to in article 57 paragraph (+) shall be as follows:
5. Nagazine clearance referred to in paragraph (+) is also applicable to the clearance referred to in article
53 paragraph (1), article 56 paragraph 3, article 57 paragraphs (2) and (3), and article 58 paragraph (3).

Section Three
Requirements of Underground Magazine

Article 60
Underground Magazine Construction and Location
1. Underground magazine shall be built on a location, which is dry, free from fire hazard, far from main
downshift shaft, protected from any potential falling rocks and flood, and separated from other
workplaces.
2. The magazine construction shall be sufficiently strong and provided with flat wall and sufficient
ventilation and airways.
3. The distance of an underground magazine shall be at least, in straight line:
a. 100 meters from shafts or other underground magazines;
b. 25 meters from workplaces;
c. 10 meters from raise or winze which is used for personnel transportation; and
d. 50 meters from blasting area.

Article 61
Layout
Underground magazine shall:
1. Be dry and flat;
2. Only be provided with one lockable stout door; and
3. Consist of two rooms connected by a lockable door:
1) Front room, located near the entrance for receiving, issuing, checking and calculating explosives to
be used. This room shall be provided with a counterfdesk and explosives inventory; and
2) Rear room, which shall be spacious and used only for storing explosives.

Section Four
Explosives Storage Procedures
Article 62
General Procedures
1. Explosives shall be stored in their original pack; with the receipt date is written on it to allow easy reading
without removing the pack.
2. Detonator shall be stored separately from other explosives in a detonator-sensitive explosives magazine.
3. Detonator-sensitive explosives shall not be stored in a primer-sensitive explosives magazine or in a blast
agent's magazine.
+. Primer-sensitive explosives may be stored in a detonator-sensitive explosives magazine, but may not be
stored in a blast agent's magazine.
5. Blast agents can be stored either in a primer-sensitive explosives magazine or in a detonator-sensitive
explosives magazine.
6. Ammunition and other similar substances may be stored together with other explosives in a magazine
only if they are piled separately, and all components made of iron at a height of three meters from the
floor shall be covered with copper or aluminum plate, or covered with concrete.
7. Room temperature shall not exceed:
a. 55 C for blast agents magazine; and
b. 35 C for detonator-sensitive explosives magazine.

Article 63
Explosives Magazine Personnel and Security
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang for a mine using explosives shall:
a. Ensure that explosives used in the mine are stored safely;
b. Appoint a competent administration personnel who must at least possess a class !! Blaster Certificate
and is believed to have understood explosives regulations; and
c. Ensure that the number of explosives magazine personnel is sufficient to guard the magazine
properly.
2. Nagazine and explosives shall only be managed by over 21 year old officers who have experience in
handling explosives, possess written authorization from Kepala Teknik Tambang, and whose names are
registered in the Nining Book.
3. Nagazine personnel shall inspect explosives receipt, storage and issuance.
+. Nagazine personnel shall ensure that the magazine is locked all the time, except during explosives
inspection, checking, receipt, and issuance.
5. Unauthorized persons, except Police Officers and Nine !nspector, shall be prohibited from entering the
magazine.
6. Only blaster and magazine personnel shall handle explosives.

Article 64
Explosives Inventory
1. A magazine shall be provided with an explosives inventory, which contains:
a. Name, type, quantity and the receipt date of the explosives; and
b. Location and the quantity of the explosives stored.
2. Any magazine shall be provided with an updated stock list, which details:
a. Name and signature of the personnel authorized to receive and issue explosives, and whose names
are registered in the Nine Book;
b. The quantity of explosives andfor detonator taken into or out of the magazine;
c. Date and time of explosives issue and return;
d. Name and signature of the personnel receiving the explosives.
3. a. Kepala Teknik Tambang should send a quarterly report to the Chief Nine !nspector on explosives stock
and consumption
b. Format of the quarterly report referred to in letter (a) of this paragraph shall be determined by the
Chief Nine !nspector.
+. The inventory and list referred to in paragraphs (1) and (2) of this article shall be compiled into a one-
year file.

Article 65
Receiving and Issuing Explosives
1. Personnel who receives explosives shall reject or return them if they are spoiled, unsafe or unworthy for
use.
2. Receiving and issuing explosives shall be performed at the magazine's front room and the connecting
door shall be closed during the transaction.
3. Requested explosives shall be issued in accordance with the sequence of receipt.
+. Explosives and detonator issued from the magazine should be in good condition and the quantity should
not exceed the requirements for one shift.
5. At the end of work shift, unused explosives shall be immediately returned to the magazine. There is no
need to re-open the returned explosives packs if they are still in the original packs or bags.
6. Spoiled explosives shall be immediately destroyed safely in accordance with the prevailing regulations.
7. Spoiled explosives data shall detail quantity, type, brand and the visible defects and shall be reported to
the Chief Nine !nspector for his advice.
8. Detonator cord shall be inspected upon receipt for possible damage and detonation velocity. At a regular
interval, it should be inspected foe its condition and detonation velocity. !deal detonation velocity for
every meter is 90 -110 seconds, or in accordance with manufacturer's specification.
9. Empty packs or other packs shall not be stored in explosives magazine or detonator magazine.
10. Explosives or detonator packs shall be opened only at the magazine's front room.

Article 66
Detonator-Sensitive Explosives Storage
1. Detonator-sensitive explosives stored in a building magazine shall:
a. Remain in the original container, and
b. Be placed on a desk of at least 30 centimeter high from the magazine floor.
1) Naximum pile height shall be 5 containers, maximum width + boxes and its length shall match
the magazine dimension;
2) !n between each container layer, there shall be a piece of wood partition of at least 1.5
centimeter thick;
3) There shall be at least 80 centimeter clearance in between the piles;
+) There shall be at least 30 centimeter clearance between the piles and the magazine wall.
2. When stored in a container magazine, the detonator-sensitive explosive shall be:
a. Piled properly to allow free air circulation around the pile; and
b. With a storage capacity of not more than 2.000 kg.

Article 67
Primer-Sensitive Explosives Storage
1. The following provisions shall apply if primer-sensitive explosives are stored in a building magazine:
The explosives shall remain in original bags;
A 25 kg bag shall be stored in accordance with provisions referred to in article 66 paragraph (1);
A +- 1.000 kg bag should:
1) Be stored with its original pallet;
2) Not be received and issued manually;
3) Be piled with:
a. Not more than 3 (three) bags high;
b. At least 75 centimeter clearance to the magazine walls; and
c. An obstacle-free path in between the piles to ensure that forklift can work freely and safely.
Should the pile height exceed the provisions referred to in paragraph (1) letter (c) point 3, a prior
approval shall be obtained from the Chief Nine !nspector, and
Forklift shall not be left unguarded in the magazine.
2. The following provisions shall apply if the primer-sensitive explosives are stored in a container magazine:
The explosives shall be in original bags;
The explosives of around 25 kg bags shall be stored in accordance with the provisions as referred to
in article 66 paragraph (1); and
The storage capacity shall not be more than 5.000 kg.
Article 6S
Blast Agents Storage
1. !f the agents are stored in a building magazine, the following profusions shall apply:
a. 30 kg bags shall be stored in accordance with the provisions referred to in article 66 paragraph (1),
except when the pile height is not more than 10 bags and the width is not more than 8 bags;
b. 1000 kg bags shall be stored in accordance with the provisions referred to in article 67 paragraph (1)
letter c; and
c. Combustion-engine forklift shall not be left unguarded in the magazine.
2. The following provisions shall apply if the blast agents are stored in a container magazine:
a. The blast agents shall be piled properly to allow free air circulation around the pile, and
b. Container capacity shall not be more than 20.000 kg.
3. The storage of blast agents in their original container shall fulfill the following requirements:
a. The container can only be placed at permitted locations as referred to in article 57 paragraph (3)
letters b and c,
b. The container must be tightly stacked so that its door can not be opened, and
c. !f the pile is of more than 2 containers high, a prior approval shall be obtained from the Chief Nine
!nspector.
+. Liquid or gel blast agents shall only be stored in a tank magazine.

Article 69
Detonator Storage
1. Detonator stock shall match the explosives stock.
2. Spoiled detonator shall be destroyed immediately in accordance with the prevailing regulations.
3. !t is forbidden to store detonator together with other explosives.

Article 70
Underground Storage
1. Underground explosives shall be stored in a magazine, but if the quantity is less than 50 kg, the
explosives can be stored in the container as referred to in article 60 paragraph (3).
2. Underground explosives magazine shall only be used for storing less than 5.000 kg explosives for 2 x 2+
hour usage.
3. !f an underground magazine is unavailable whereas explosives usage is more than 50 kg in less than 2+
hours, a temporary storage, which is approved by the Chief Nine !nspector, shall be available.

Article 71
Magazine Inspection
At least once in a week, the stock in the magazine shall be thoroughly inspected by the Kepala Teknik
Tambang or authorized personnel, and the findings shall be recorded in a special book.

Section Five
Transportation

Article 72
Transportation Provisions
1. Explosives shall be delivered to and stored in the magazine within no longer than 2+ hours as of their
arrival at the mine area.
2. Explosives transportation to or from the magazine or around the mine area shall only be allowable by
using the enclosed original bags or a special closed container. The leftover from the transfer of explosives
from their original bag to an enclosed container shall be immediately delivered to, and stored in the
magazine.
3. The Chief Nine !nspector shall establish technical instruction to arrange the transportation, transfer or
delivery of all kinds of explosives and detonator within or around the mine area.
+. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish the company regulation to arrange the explosives transportation,
transfer and delivery in accordance with technical instruction as referred to in paragraph (1).

Section Six
Blasting

Article 73
Regulation on Blasting Operation
1. The Chief Nine !nspector shall issue technical instruction to regulate blasting operation in the mine.
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish company regulation to regulate blasting operation referred to in
paragraph (1).

Article 74
Blasting Equipment and Accessories
1. All mining operations, which use explosives, shall provide all necessary equipment and accessories in
order to conduct the blasting operation safely.
2. The blasting operation shall utilize equipment provided by Kepala Teknik Tambang.
3. Kepala Teknik Tambang or officer in charge of the explosives in a mine which uses explosives shall:
Ensure that all equipment, including any vehicles related to blasting operation are:
1) Suitable to their intended use, and
2) Stored, inspected and maintained to make sure that they can operate safely.
Ensure that the explosives are handled safely.
+. All blasting machines shall be provided with removable cranks or keys, without which the blasting
machine cannot be operated.

Article 75
Appointment and Classification of Blaster
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall appoint a personnel capable of performing blasting operation
2. The person referred to in paragraph (1) shall be at least 21 years old and in possession of a Blasting
Permit issued by the Chief Nine !nspector.
3. The Blasting Permit shall only be applicable at the mine scribed on the permit, and the holder's name
shall be registered in the Nine Book.
+. The Blasting Permit shall only be issued for certified blaster.
5. The Director General shall appoint permanent committee for blaster examination.
6. The Director General shall establish provisions related to:
a. Examination committee work procedures;
b. Examination procedures;
c. Qualification of blaster course participant;
d. Blaster examination budget;
e. Blaster certificate classes; and
f. Blaster examination materials.
7. The Chief Nine !nspector can acknowledge any blaster certificates issued either by domestic or foreign
institution.
8. Any acknowledged certificates referred to in paragraph (8) has the same value as that of blaster
certificate and can be used to obtain a Blasting Permit.
9. Any blasters holding a Blasting Permit shall return the permit via Kepala Teknik Tambang to be handed to
the Chief Nine !nspector at the latest of one month after the holder's unemployment.
Article 76
Blaster Course
1. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall provide education facilities for personnel involving in blasting
operation, especially unskilled blasters, to obtain blasting experience.
2. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall always take safety measures to ensure that blaster trainees work
under a close supervision of an assigned blaster.
3. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall arrange training program for blaster trainee and ensure that the
program is conducted properly.

Article 77
Blasting Operation
1. The Kepala Teknik Tambang for a mine using explosives shall establish blasting operation regulation,
which ensures that a., the explosives are used safely; b. the blasting operation is in accordance with
operation procedures established by the Chief Nine !nspector.
2. The blaster in charge shall ensure that each blast operation stage is conducted safely and in accordance
with the procedures established by the Chief Nine !nspector and the mine blast guidelines.
3. A blaster can only perform blasting.
+. !t is prohibited to charge a blast hole or blast the previously initiated blast hole, except when intended to
handle a misfire in accordance with the prevailing provisions.
5. !t is prohibited to lift detonator cable, initiation cord or other accessories out of the charged and primed
blast hole.
6. !t is prohibited to smoke or lit a flame in a distance less than 10 meters from the explosives.
7. !t is prohibited to use initiation cord intended for underground ore mine after the date that will be
determined by the Chief Nine !nspector.
8. The Blaster-in-charge shall ensure that the blasting operation does not generate excessive ground blast
vibration.

Article 7S
Sleeping Blasting
1. Sleeping blasting shall comply with the following provisions: a. Detonator shall not be used in the blast
hole. B. Sleeping blasting area shall be cleared.
2. The Chief Nine !nspector shall approve the use of detonator in the blast holes of a sleeping blasting.

Article 79
Misfire
1. Should a misfire occur, the blaster shall contact the blaster-in-charge, and he shall:
a. Permit no body, except the blaster and the appointed person, to enter the blast area.
b. Take appropriate measures to determine the causes of and to handle the misfire; and
c. Appoint personnel, when needed, to take safety measures to prevent theft against explosive and
initiation accessories.
2. A blast shall be regarded a misfire when:
a. Pre-blast inspection shows an irreparable misconnection, or
b. A blast hole or part of a blast hole fails to detonate when fired.




CHAPTER III
WORKPLACE ENVIRONMENT

Section One

Article S0
General Obligations
1. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that the workers are protected from health hazards caused by
air, solid substances, chemicals and noises, lighting and vibration hazards.
2. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish regulations on sampling procedures, measurement of
hazardous air and solid substance, and monitoring of noise, lighting and vibration in a mine work
environment and all places within or nearby the mine area.

Section Two
Dust

Article S1
Prevention
1. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall:
a. Take necessary actions to suppress dust during drilling, blasting and ore or rock crushing and at
other mining works, and establish company regulation regarding dust suppression and control;
b. Obligate mine workers to wear suitable dust protection equipment;
c. Establish company regulation on dust control at every workplace, loading and unloading points,
transfer point, crushing point and haul roads where hazard is liable to occur due to visibility
restriction.
d. Establish company regulation on mechanical ventilation for a blind shaft and other poorly ventilated
areas.
2. Every ore or rock loading points onto trucks or transfer point shall be water-wetted or enclosed to
prevent dust from airborne.
3. Dust suppression equipment shall only be operated or removed by authorized personnel.
+. !f the Nine !nspector considers that the dust resulted by the mining activities can disturb and endanger
health and restrict vision, he may establish necessary actions to prevent and suppress the dust or protect
mine workers from inhaling dust. The actions shall be recorded in the Nine Book.

Article S2
Measurement
1. The Chief Nine !nspector can establish requirements on dust concentration at every workplace, including
dust suppression, dust grain specification and allowable threshold point.
2. The analysis method used to determine the Chief Nine !nspector should recognize free silicon contained
in the dust.

Article S3
Personal Protective Equipment
1. Preventing pollution and installing exhaust fan or diluting the polluted air shall conduct protection to
workers from hazardous polluted air. !f these prevention measures have not been taken, the workers
shall wear suitable respiratory protector.
2. !f the personal protective equipment is used, its selection and training on maintenance, installation,
supervision, cleaning and use shall be in accordance with the provisions of authorized institution.

Article S4
Flammable Dust
1. Flammable dust shall be cleaned and prevented from accumulating on the surface of electrical
appliances, buildings and other facilities.
2. The accumulation of flammable dust shall be prevented from reaching dangerous level.
3. Schedule for cleaning and disposing accumulated flammable dust shall be established and implemented
properly.

Section Three

Noise and Vibration
Article S5
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall take measures to reduce noise and vibration to an acceptable level and
provide hearing protection equipment.
2. !f the workers wear hearing protection equipment, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall arrange limitation of
working hours in a noisy workplace in accordance with the noise level.
3. Workers exposed to high level of noise shall wear hearing protection equipment.
+. The Chief Nine !nspector shall determine the limit for the criteria or guidelines for allowable noise and
vibration level at the workplace.
5. Based on workplace characteristic, the Chief Nine !nspectors shall arrange:
a. Noise and vibration level measurement program and its implementation;
b. Neasurement and methods used at the program, including equipment and analysis methods;
c. Time and frequency of measurement; and
d. Location of measurement.

Section Four
Toxic and Hazardous Substance

Article S6
Handling, Storage and Labeling
1. !f hazardous corrosive or toxic acids or chemical substances are manufactured, transferred utilized and
stored in the factory, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish guidelines to minimize the hazards in
handling and storing the substances to the lowest possible level.
2. At the locations where the substances referred to in paragraph (1) are available, a Hazard Caution and
Preventive Neasurements Label shall be installed at visible location.
3. Bottles or cylinders containing acid or toxic chemical substances shall be labeled indicating their content.
+. Substances, which can create potential hazard upon spillage, shall be stored properly and securely.
5. Chemical substances, including concentrated acids and alkali shall be stored properly to prevent any
contact, which can create powerful reaction or release hazardous gas or vapor.
6. Any water or solution in a refinery or laboratory shall be regarded poisonous, except if Drinking Water"
label is attached.
7. Chemicals shall be handled in accordance with implementation regulation or guidelines from the
manufacturer. Personnel handling the chemical substances shall be informed of the potential hazard and
its remedy.

Article S7
Occupational Hygiene and Health
1. Nine !nspector can request workers' health examination if the work involves toxic and hazardous
substances which can endanger the workers' health, especially at a refinery.
2. Cups and other laboratory equipment shall not be used for eating, drinking and cooking.
3. At a workplace where hazardous or toxic solution are used or manufactured, a sufficient quantity of
antidote and cleansing water shall be provided at visible and accessible locations. Emergency shower and
eye wash station shall also be available. The antidote and cleansing water box shall be labeled and
provided with use instruction.
+. At workplaces referred to in paragraph (3), all supervisors and a number of workers, at least one for each
shift, shall be trained on First Aids, particularly on the use of antidote and eye wash cleansing water.

Article SS
Prevention and control
1. All hazardous liquids and substances shall be handled with care to minimize spillage possibility.
2. Containers of liquid ammonia or volatile chemicals or chemicals containing hazardous vapor shall not be
filled up to more than of its capacity to prevent excessive pressure accumulation.
3. Any spillage shall be cleaned and disposed immediately. !nstantaneous reaction or toxic chemical spillage
shall be diluted and neutralized carefully and cleaned immediately.

Article S9
Personal Protective Equipment
1. !f protective measures established by the company regulation are not sufficient to eliminate hazards,
workers who are exposed to the hazards shall wear personal protective equipment.
2. Workers who handle and mix hazardous chemicals should wear suitable respiratory protector and gloves.
3. Additional preventive measures shall be taken in handling hazardous solution of concentrated lime, pulp,
and other chemical substances to prevent direct contact with skin.
+. Personal protective clothing for workers working in laboratory shall be provided at no charge and
maintained in good and hygienic condition.

Article 90
Other Protective Measures
1. Spontaneous reaction substances shall be stored in a sufficiently spacious room to prevent heat from
expanding.
2. Assay room or other rooms where noxious gasses are liable to occur shall be well ventilated.
3. Extreme care shall be taken when handling flammable chemicals and mixing acid solution

Article 91
1. vapor, fog, smoke and gas shall be suppressed and confined in order not to exceed the threshold value
before being discharged.
2. Toxic substances, which are used or generated at a mine operation area and refinery, shall be provided
with label mentioning the potential hazards and their preventive measures.
3. Radioactive substances shall always be well enclosed in order to protect the workers from radiation and
ionization hazards.






CHAPTER IV
MINE FACILITIES ON THE GROUND SURFACE

Section One
Building, Structure, Entrance and Exit

Article 92
Building and Structure
1. Every building and structure at a mining area shall be of robust construction and maintained in good
condition.
2. Any workplaces in a building or structure shall be provided with safe entrance.
3. !f any part of a building or structure, such as light roof, is not strong enough to support maintenance
personnel, it shall be provided with a hazard sign at visible location and a safe access.
+. !f traffic road or entrance is obstructed by, among other things, belt conveyor or pipe, a permanent
crossing facility with suitable construction shall be provided.

Article 93
Protection Against Falling Hazard
1. !f someone works at a height of more than 2.5 meters from the working floor, he shall be protected
against falling hazard with safety bars or handrails. !f such equipment is not practical, safety harness or
belt shall be used or safety net installed.
2. !f someone works on or in a building with the height or size that makes scaffold, safety bar or safety net
are impractical to use, a sturdy anchor shall be used to suspend harness, plank or gondola.

Article 94
Gantry
1. Gantry shall be provided with pathway of at least 1 meter wide, tightly joined, and free from cavity on its
floor surface. !f the pathway is more than 1.5 meter high above the floor, the open side shall be fenced
or parameter and provided with closely joined frame of at least 10 cm high on the floor.
2. !f a gantry is used as pathway for materials and personnel transportation, the two pathways shall be
separated and only authorized personnel are allowed to pass that for materials transportation.

Article 95
Stairway, Hatchway, and Wall Opening
1. !f a stairway is installed at the building floor or gantry, it shall be provided with handrails and a standard
size floor frame, or provided with a door, which opens to the upward position to ensure that it is safe
when opened up.
2. Any stairways having more than four steps shall be provided with handrails and standard-size floor frame.
3. Entrance to a protruding floor or suspended platform, where a worker is liable to fall from a 1.2 meter
high shall be provided with cross chain, cross bar or door and provided with hazard notice.

Article 96
Ladder Use
1. Portable ladder shall only be used as temporary access to a workplace, and shall not be used as working
floor.
2. Only portable ladder of safety standard is allowed to use. Ladder indicating damage or fracture signs shall
not be used. All ladders shall be inspected and repaired periodically.
3. Portable ladder shall be set up on a flat and strong base and rested on a strong landing, and there shall
be an extension of at least 1 meter at the top of the landing, except when equipped with safety catch or
hand rails. Any ladder shall be set up in a safe angle and both ends are tied to avoid slippage. Upper and
lower floors shall be free of any obstacles when the ladder is in use.
+. !t is forbidden to use a portable ladder in horizontal position as platform, pathway or gondola.
5. The ladder shall be stored immediately after use.

Article 97
Silo and Bunker
1. Doors or other entrance openings into a silo or bunker shall be locked, and the appointed supervisor shall
keep the key.
2. !f the outlet hopper is plugged the worker shall not be allowed to get into the silo or bunker except when
a prior inspection has been performed to ensure a safe condition and that no substances are sticking on
the wall.
3. Open silo or bunker, into which access is possible, or a bottom outlet hopper bunker shall be provided
with iron bars capable of covering the entire top open end. The bars shall be sturdy enough to prevent
the workers from falling into the silo or bunker, but still allow the worker to inspect or poke a substance
therein.
+. Silo and bunker containing flammable substances shall be constructed of fire resistant materials. Any
lighting installed within or above the silo or bunker shall be fireproof, and the use of electrical heater shall
be prohibited. Special safety measures shall be taken if the substances stored therein are capable of
releasing flammable, noxious or hazardous gases or flammable dust.
5. Naintenance and repair works shall only be done when the silo or bunker is completely empty.
6. Entrance into a filled silo or bunker shall only be done under the order of supervisor in charge who has
ensured that all entrances are closed and locked. Entrance is only from the top, and the worker shall
always be at the top level of the substances contained therein. Harness shall be used and safety belt shall
be tightly tied, and except when it is of automatic lock type.

Section Two
Lighting

Article 9S
General Lighting
1. Workplace not receiving sufficient sunlight at a certain time shall be provided with lighting.
2. Lighting and all its appliances be cleaned and repaired regularly.

Article 99
The Use of Naked Lamp
!t is forbidden to use naked lamp at places where dust, gas, vapor or other easily flammable substances, or
dry wood are available. !t is forbidden to install a naked lamp at locations liable to be touched by workers or
equipment.

Article 100
Emergency Lamp
1. Places such as machinery room, opening, loading and unloading points and other places, which are liable
to hazards due to the absence of illumination, shall be provided with a sufficient number of emergency
lamps.
2. The Nine !nspector can determine provisions regarding supplementary and emergency lamps for each
place.


Article 101
Portable Lamp
Places not furnished with lighting shall be provided with a sufficient number of per table lamps for inspection
and test purposes.

Section Three
Fire Prevention and Control

Article 102
Fire Classification
Fire can be classified into:
a. Class A Fire - resulted by the burning of solid material, except metal;
b. Class B Fire - resulted by the burning of flammable liquid or gas; and
c. Class C Fire - fire on electrical appliances, caused by electric current.

Article 103
Fire Handling
1. A worker who notices a fire shall immediately take measures to put it out.
2. !f the measures referred to in paragraph (1) are not effective in putting the fire out, the worker shall
immediately inform his line supervisor and instruct all potentially affected workers to evacuate. Fire alarm
shall be sounded.

Article 104
Prohibition to Smoke and Use Naked Flame
1. !t is prohibited to smoke or use naked flame when using transporting, storing or handling flammable
liquids or gasses, including lubricating oil.
2. No Smoking" and No Naked Flame" signs shall be clearly installed at areas liable to fire and explosion.

Article 105
General Pre-requisites
1. At any mining operation, ready-for-use fire extinguishers shall be available for a. extinguisher fire at
ignition stage, and b. extinguisher fire at fully developed stage.
2. Fire extinguisher shall be:
a. Available in suitable types, sizes and quantity to extinguish all classes of fire; and
b. Placed at strategic, easily accessible and clearly indicated locations, and maintained in ready-for-use
condition.

Article 106
Fire Extinguisher Selection
1. Fire extinguisher shall match the fire hazards: a. Class A: for Class A fire; b. Class B: for Class B fire, but
also applicable for Class A fire; and c. Class C: for Class C fire, but also applicable for Class A and B fires.
2. Every extinguisher shall be identified of its class, capacity and authorization signs.

Article 107
Fire Extinguisher Placement
1. Portable fire extinguisher shall be placed on a standard hook or on easily accessible or noticed rack. !ts
stop end shall not be more than 1.5 meter high and its bottom end shall not be less than 80-centimeter
high prom the floor.
2. !f the fire extinguisher is not easily visible, the location shall be arrow-indicated and the access path shall
be free from any obstacles.
3. Reserved fire extinguisher shall always be stored at designated places.

Article 10S
Maintenance
1. Fire Extinguisher and other fire fighting equipment, supporting equipment and all emergency apparatus
shall always be maintained in ready-for use condition.
2. Fire extinguisher shall always be in fully charged and ready-for use condition. Every worker using a fire
extinguisher shall report its use for recharging.
3. Prior to charging a fire extinguisher, all its accessories shall be well cleaned.
+. Charging date and personnel signature shall be written in the logbook andfor on the label attached to the
fire extinguisher.
5. Every fire extinguisher shall be handled in accordance with the manufacturer's instruction.
6. !f hydrant becomes a part of fire fighting system, it shall always be maintained in ready-for-use condition.
7. !f non-company fire brigade is used, Siamese connections, which match all hydrants, shall be provided.

Article 109
Inspection
1. Fire extinguisher shall be inspected once in a month at least to ensure that it is fully charged and ready
for use.
2. At least once in a year, an inspection shall be performed on all parts of fire extinguishing mechanism,
quantity and state of cylinder charge, hose condition, nozzle and cylinder to ensure that the fire
extinguisher function effectively.
3. Fire extinguisher shall be hydrostatically tested for 20 kg per centimeter per square meter or 1.5 x work
pressure or once in five years in accord with the manufacturer's specification.
+. visual inspection for damaged or brittle water pipe, tap, outlet pipe, hydrant and hose, which become a
part of the fire extinguishing system shall be conducted at least once in three months, and testing shall
be performed at least once in a year to ensure that the fire extinguisher functions properly.
5. Personnel performing inspection or test referred to in this regulation shall provide a statement letter,
mentioning the inspection and test date.
6. The statement letter of hydrostatical test referred to in paragraph (3) shall be kept until the next test, or
until the fire extinguisher is no longer in service.

Article 110
Housekeeping
1. Workplace cleanliness and tidiness shall always be maintained, either in or around the mine area or
building as well as in all other workplaces.
2. !t is forbidden to dump liquid or solid waste in a quantity that is prone to create fire hazard.
3. Garbage or rags containing flammable or combustible substances shall be stored in a fireproof closed
metal container.
+. Flammable or combustible liquid spillage or leakage shall be immediately cleaned and handled to prevent
any fire hazards.
5. Used carbide container shall be washed immediately. Smoking and the use of naked flame shall be
strictly prohibited during the washing. Waste carbide shall be disposed in accordance with the prevailing
regulations.

Article 111
Fire Prone Areas
1. !f the Chief Nine !nspector or authorized personnel considers a workplace as prone to fire due to
smoking or the use of naked flame or matches or other incendiary devices, the Chief Nine !nspector or
the authorized personnel can determine the workplace as a fire prone area.
2. Smoking, bringing or using naked lamp, matches or incendiary devices in a fire-prone area shall be
strictly prohibited.
3. Notices shall be installed and maintained at the fire prone area as long as the fire hazard status is not
lifted.

Article 112
Storage of Flammable Liquids and Substances
1. Gasoline, lubricating oil, grease, oil products and other flammable liquids shall be stored in an enclosed
container and separated from other substances.
2. Lubricating oil and grease warehouse shall be of fire-resistant construction and well ventilated.
3. !t is prohibited to store gasoline, lubricating oil, grease, and other oil or flammable materials at the same
place. !f it is inevitable, fire-resistant walls shall separate the materials.

Article 113
Heat source
Heat source, which can generate fire, shall be separated from any flammable materials.

Article 114
Battery Charging Room
1. Battery charging room shall be sufficiently ventilated to prevent hydrogen gas from accumulating.
2. !t is prohibited to smoke, use naked flame or perform other activities, which can generate fire in battery
charging room.
3. Battery charging room shall be provided with clear No Smoking" and No Naked Flame" signs.
+. Electric appliance shall, when possible, not be installed in the battery charging room.

Article 115
Warehouse for Flammable or Combustible Materials
1. Ground level warehouse for flammable liquids, including grease shall be sufficiently ventilated to prevent
volatile flammable vapor or gas from accumulating.
2. The warehouse shall possess fire resistant degree of minimum 1 hour.
3. The storage of flammable or combustible liquids in a potential fire hazard area shall be provided with
early fire detector or fire alarm to warn the potentially affected persons of the fire.

Article 116
Storage of Oxygen Cylinder and Flammable Gas
1. !t is prohibited to store oxygen cylinder in flammable gases or liquid, or grease storage area. All cylinders
shall be stored in an upright position.
2. Working pressure gauge and regulator of oxygen, acetylene, and LPG cylinders shall be clean and free
from lubricating oil and grease.
3. When transporting oxygen, acetylene, and LPG cylinders, or when the cylinders are not in use or when
the welding work is completed, the cylinders are valve shall be closed and its safety cap shall be fitted.
Article 116
Storage of Oxygen Cylinder and Flammable Gas
1. !t is prohibited to store oxygen cylinder in flammable gases or liquid, or grease storage area. All cylinders
shall be stored in an upright position.
2. Working pressure gauge and regulator of oxygen, acetylene, and LPG cylinders are not in use or when
the welding work is completed, the cylinder valve shall be closed and safety cap shall be fitted.

Article 117
Pipe or Container Welding Preparation
Before welding, cutting or using naked flame on pipes or flammablefcombustible liquid and solid containers,
the pipes or containers shall be:
a. Dried, ventilated and cleaned from oil;
b. Opened (if capped) to prevent pressure build up when in contact with air;
c. When possible, filled with inert gas or water; and
d. Checked for flammable gas prior to work, or periodically during the work, by using detector.

Article 11S
Combustion Engine Refueling
Combustion engine shall be turned off during refueling.

Article 119
Workshop
1. Ground level workshop shall be at least 60 meters away from an entrance to underground mine and
ventilation plant used on downshift shaft.
2. Workshop furnace shall be provided with exhaust fan and ventilation to prevent accumulation of
combustion remains.
3. At the end of each shift, workshop and the surrounding areas shall be inspected for amber.
+. Heating equipment shall be set up properly to prevent them from generating fire due to overheating. Fire
sparks protection shall be provided where necessary.

Article 120
Fire Protection at Certain Works
1. Suitable fire extinguisher shall be provided adjacent to a diesel or electric engine.
2. Suitable fire extinguisher shall be an inherent part of a portable welding equipment. Welding or cutting
work shall be prohibited if fire extinguisher is not readily available nearby.
3. Fire extinguisher shall be readily available when spoiled explosives are being destroyed.
+. Four or more wheeled motor vehicles shall be provided with suitable fire extinguisher.

Article 121
Emergency Exit
1. Any buildings shall be provided with sufficient quantity of, and well-maintained emergency exits, which
are easily accessible and connected with other occupied rooms. The exit shall include:
a. Fire resistant emergency stairs which are equipped with flame-proof door at each story, including
underground story, and
b. External stairs made of metal or incombustible materials, which are equipped with handrails and
platform at each story and directly connected, to the building by an iron or fire resistant door.
2. Should a space or room or part of a building, due to the nature of its equipment or the process taking
place therein, be liable to fire, vapor leakage, chemical vapor, and poisonous hazards or other similar
hazards, the building shall be equipped with two similar but separated exits.
3. Emergency exit shall be obstacle-free, and the doors leading to the stairs door or smoke-tight room shall
always be opened. All doors shall open toward the emergency escape route.

Article 122
Fire Brigade
1. A mining company having fire trucks shall establish a fire brigade.
2. Every fire brigade crew shall obtain sufficient training.
3. The fire brigade shall periodically inspect all mine activities and facilities for any potential fire hazards
+. There shall always be at least one fire brigade crew on duty at each shift.
5. At ground level work, besides the crewmember referred to in paragraph (+) hereof, at least 20 of the
total workers and all security guards shall know the operation of, and be capable of operating, the fire
fighting equipment.
6. Suitable safety equipment shall always be available and personnel who will might need them shall be
trained to use them.

Article 123
Fire Fighting System and Procedures
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang or the authorized personnel shall establish fire fighting personal rescue, and
emergency rescue procedures, and carry out rehearsal periodically.
2. Fire fighting system and procedures shall be regulated to immediately warm the potentially affected
person of a fire.
3. Fire hazard sign or alarm equipment shall always be maintained in ready-for use condition and tested
periodically.

Section Four
Transportation Safety

Element 1
Train Transportation
Article 124
1. The provisions herein shall be applicable to all vehicles designed for traveling on a rail and driven by
locomotive.
2. Train transportation used outside the mine area, and the personnel and materials transportation shall
adhere to any regulations of the related institutions.
3. Train personnel shall have obtained guidelines on work safety and procedures applicable to train
transportation.
+. !t is prohibited to carry passengers on vehicle traveling on rails, except for yardmasters or maintenance
personnel who work on the locomotive or coach.
5. All mine workers shall obey train operation procedures established by Kepala Teknik Tambang
(Transportation Regulation), namely:
a. Prohibition to carry passenger, except casualty, on a coach which is transporting minerals or
equipment;
b. Prohibition to mount and dismount a moving vehicle;
c. Prohibition to ride in the exterior of a coach, except when equipped with platform and hand rails; and
d. Prohibition to walk across a trailer or train.

Article 125
Transportation Safety
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that specification of transportation system has been established and its
copy has been sent to the Chief Nine !nspector. The specification shall contain:
a. Transportation network map, including road gradient, turning radius and other important data;
b. Detailed information on equipment number, types, and technical specification.
c. Complete operation regulations, which are applicable to the system regarding request for a passenger
transportation permit; and the Chief Nine !nspector, can make an amendment prior to issuing a permit.

Article 126
Transportation Regulation
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish company regulation on transportation which covers:
a. Railway construction, elevation, gradient, size, and railway bearing, etc;
b. Turning radius and elevation, including side rails when the turning radius is less than 25 meters;
c. Railway couplings, bolt numbers or welding specifications;
d. Specification of free track along both sides of the railway shall not be less than 60 cm from any train
parts, and it should be safe for any materials protruding out of the train swaying on a curve;
e. Provisions on guarded or automatic rails and other safety procedures on rails intersection with major
road or track, or in railway lines passing a settlement area;
f. Prohibition or provision to push the train or to push and pull the train, including communication
equipment for the driver;
g. Requirements for lighting during dark hours or severe weather which causes visibility restriction;
h. Rear and front warning lights can be detached if the yardmaster is in front of the train;
i. Provisions and work procedures of safety devices, coupling poles and sprigs, etc., and the procedures
for handling, controlling and driving a coach on a railway, and supervision and control of points.
j. Qualification, experience and age of a driver shall be at least 21 years old, and 18 years old for a rail
guard and a yardmaster.
k. Details of permanent signal and other signal code system, either visual or audio signs, both in and
out of locomotive of train;
l. Provisions on loading onto the coach and trailer, and maximum load and train length;
m. Speed limits and regulation on a turning or hazard areas;
n. Prohibition or special regulation on the transportation of hazardous materials;
o. Overtaking a train at adjacent railways;
p. Safety measures for a derailed or disconnected and out of control coach, and preventive measures to
prevent accident against railway officer or the community;
q. Accident preventive measures;
r. Periodical inspection on all railways, signals and drainage, and inspection and maintenance for
locomotive, coach and other mechanical equipment;
s. Hand signal procedures;
t. Safe method of returning a derailed train to its track.
2. Additional regulations for electric train:
a. Ninimum clearance for aerial cable shall not be less than 5 meters.
b. Preventive measures when working under aerial cable.
c. Prohibition to load or unload or arrange locomotive or train loads under a life cable;
d. Preventive measures against short circuits or arc to the surrounding metal components; and
e. Aerial cable or electric rail and necessary measures when aerial cable is cut out.
3. Transportation provisions stipulated herein shall be given to the Chief Nine !nspector, and its copy
installed at the mine office and distributed to all transportation personnel. The Nine !nspector reserves
the authority to amend transportation provisions, where he deems necessary to ensure transportation
safety.

Article 127
Locomotive
1. Steam locomotive; including auxiliary compressor and brake system shall comply with the provisions on
pressure vessel and pressure engine.
2. !f two locomotives are connected and its control connected, they shall be regarded as a single unit; and if
the control is not connected, signal codes for the driver shall be established.
3. During the locomotive operation, the machinist shall always be in the control room, in position to easily
reach the brake and observant to the brake system pressure.
+. !f the locomotive is left unguarded or is to travel for a long time, the park brake shall be applied and all
control equipment shall be in neutral position. Diesel and gasoline engine shall be turned off, electric
current at an electric locomotive shall be cut off, and the pantograph disconnected from the life cable.

Element 2
Cable Car
Article 12S
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be responsible for all plants, equipment and construction related to the
cable car.
2. Cable car plant shall only be used upon approval of the Chief Nine !nspector regarding the route and
details of technical specifications of the plant.
3. Cable car used for transporting mineworkers to and from the workplaces shall be equipped with a license
from the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 129
Inspection and Maintenance
1. Personnel on board to inspect or maintain part of the cable car shall only comply with the following
provisions:
a. The cable car shall be:
1) !ncapable of being turned upside down;
2) Fully enclosed up to a height of 1.2 meters from the floor to prevent a passengers or materials
from being thrown out of the cable car;
3) Provided with sturdy hand rails in a position easily reached by all passengers;
+) Well constructed to prevent the passengers from being contacted by part of the track wheels;
and
5) Provided with an inward-opening door.
b. !t is prohibited to ride alone on a cable car. Naximum passenger of a cable car shall be determined
by the officer-in-charge;
c. Personnel shall be transported by one cable car at a time;
d. Passengers and driving machine operators shall be provided with communication equipment;
e. !t is prohibited to transport passengers when the weather is bad.
2. The assigned personnel, whose names are registered by Kepala Teknik Tambang in the Nine Book, shall
perform daily inspection and maintenance.

Article 130
Cable Car Construction
1. Positive action brake and its equipment shall be able to operate automatically when electric current is cut
off to prevent the cable car from reversing.
2. Every rail cable coupling shall be constructed in such a way to reduce resistance against the rail route.
3. Tower shall be protected from the damage resulted from the cable car oscillation.
+. Bridge, safety net, and other protection equipment shall be provided if the cable car is to pass over a
road, railway line, track or building.
5. Direct communication between terminals and intermediate stations shall be available.


Article 131
Cable, Disk and Cable Car
1. Pulling cable and rail cable shall possess at least five times and four times safety factors respectively of
the maximum load in normal work condition.
2. All cables shall be inspected and greased regularly in accordance with maintenance schedule.
3. Personnel whose names are registered in the Nine Book shall record details of the cables' inspection,
lubrication, replacement or repair in cable book".
+. Based on the information in the cable book", Kepala Teknik Tambang shall assess the length of cable
service and replace it at due time. Pulling cable and rail cable shall not be used for more than 5 years and
15 years, respectively, unless otherwise determined by the Chief Nine !nspector.
5. !t is prohibited to use cable, which is specially designed for rail cable and pulling cable to connect endless
rope or to make knots.
6. Cable supporting disk shall be maintained in smooth run to ensure that the pulling cable run on its lane.
7. Clamp iron at each cable car, which does not function properly, shall be replaced immediately.

Article 132
Cable Car Operation
1. Tower or cable pole of more than 20 meters high from the ground shall be provided with a red lamp at
the top. !f it is more than +0 meters high, a red lamp shall also be provided at the middle of the pole,
and the pole shall be red-and-white striped. The lamp shall be turned on during dark hours or bad
weather.
2. Every pole shall be provided with properly operating lightning arrester.
3. Cable car shall be loaded level and not exceeding its capacity. The loads shall not protrude above the
cable, and:
a. Feed hopper shall be adjusted to prevent spillage;
b. Loaded cable car shall be driven slowly to prevent the car from swinging; and
c. Cable car shall be cleaned regularly from any sticking materials to prevent instability when the car is
empty.
+. Drive engine of the personnel transportation cable car shall always be attended when the cable car is in
operation.
5. !t is prohibited to stay beneath a cable car or any materials suspended from lifting equipment.

Article 133
Cable Car Transportation Regulation
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish a transportation regulation covering safe procedures for operating
cable car system; and its copies shall be distributed to each personnel working at each section.

Element 3
The Rails and Slope Rails
Article 134
1. This part shall applicable to any mine transportation systems, including vehicles, which are traveling on
rail and pulled by cable and all driving powers, including gravity.
2. !t is prohibited to assign someone to work on a transportation system, unless he has obtained guidelines
on transportation safety and operation system.
3. !t is prohibited to load passengers or to mount a vehicle or other part of a transportation system unless
permitted by the Chief Nine !nspector.
+. Any request for special permit to load passengers shall be forwarded to Kepala Teknik Tambang and
enclosed with detailed specification, and mechanical and electrical equipment of the transportation
system requested, and implementation regulation that will be established.
5. The Chief Nine !nspector can amend any parts of the transportation system or its implementation
regulation to ensure the safety of passengers.

Article 135
Trails Transportation Regulations
1. To ensure safe operation of transportation system, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish detailed
transportation regulations which cover transportation related matters, including special regulations for:
a. Construction standard of railway line, gradient, turning radius, sleepers, auxiliary rails on turn, rail
coupling, and drainage;
b. Ninimum clearance between vehicles and permanent elements or obstruction along the rails shall be
60 cm, and allow the vehicle;
c. Preventive measures in case that the transportation system intersects with a road or track;
d. Naximum speed;
e. Naximum load and number of car for each train;
f. Lighting during dark hours operation or when visibility is reduced due to bad weather;
g. Front warning lights;
h. The use of safety equipment;
i. Nanual pushing of a lorry, siding or overtaking;
j. Signal method and codes;
k. Age and qualification of the machinist or train personnel shall not be less than 21 and 18 years old
respectively;
l. Transportation of bulk loads or hazardous materials;
m. Preventive measures against disconnected and out-of-control car to protect train personnel and the
public against hazards;
n. Daily inspection of all railway lines, signals, and drainage lines, and testing of drive engine, coach and
all mechanical and electrical equipment, rope, chain and other accessories.
2. Transportation regulation shall be presented to the Chief Nine !nspector, and the copy attached at the
mine office and given to all transportation personnel.
3. The Nine !nspector shall be authorized to amend the regulation if he considers that it is necessary to
ensure the safety of transportation system.

Article 136
Signal and Warnings
1. Any transportation system operating on the ground level or part of underground section in a mine
operation shall fulfill open cut mine provisions and regulations, and all signal regulations shall be
consistent through the system.
2. Every transportation system shall only be controlled with visual or sound signals, which are sent to the
machinist's compartment or machinery section and at the same time, transmitted at each intermediate
station and terminal station. The copy of these signal regulations shall be attached at places where the
signals are normally sent.
3. Any intersection with public road or track shall be provided with safety gate or other safety devices,
which must be closed, along with audio and visual signs, when the train is passing.
+. Safety device for an out-of-control lorry shall be able to operate automatically.

Article 137
Auto- Brake or Gravity Brake
Any system employing gravity brake shall satisfy the following additional requirement:
a. Application brake shall be separate from park brake, and both shall be able to resist maximum load and
stop the vehicle at a maximum speed and load. Park brake shall be of down-screwed lever or of similar
design;
b. Application brake shall be of dead-man type, which is always automatically in operation except when
released by the brakeman.
c. Nachineries and brake teeth should be rigid and protected from being crushed by other vehicles, which
can damage the equipment.
d. The brake shall be applied during loading and unloading;
e. Loading and unloading works at a gravity haulage vehicles cannot be done simultaneously at the top and
bottom; and
f. The brakeman shall only be allowed to let the vehicles go off after receiving signals from both station.

Article 13S
Cable and Disk
1. For a system working partly underground, cable safety factor shall comply with the safety factor of a
shaft hoisting cable. For other system, the pulling cable shall posses safety factor of at least five times of
the specified maximum load.
2. All cable shall be inspected and greased regularly in accordance with maintenance schedule, and
personnel whose names are registered in the Nine Book shall record the inspection result in the cable
book.
3. The pulling cable shall be sufficiently supported along its length by using properly maintained and free
turning disk (s). !f deemed necessary, the cable shall be run on the disk.
+. At any turns, supporting wheels for curving and reducing vibration shall be installed to prevent the cable
from hitting the fittings and to prevent hazardous oscillation.

Element 4
Other Vehicles

Article 139
General Application
This part shall be applicable to any mechanically powered vehicles or similar vehicles including those pulled
by trailer, which become part of time equipment, but shall not be:
a. Designed for use on rail or cable route;
b. Non driver-mounted design; and
c. Notorcycles.

Article 140
Construction and Equipment of Vehicles
1. The construction and equipment of vehicles operating on public road shall comply with the regulations of
authorized institution.
2. The vehicles construction shall match its workload standard and shall only be operated in accordance
with the original equipment Nanufacturer (O.E.N) specification.
3. vehicles with gross weight of more than 16 tons (including trailer and load) shall be provided with two
brake systems to prevent any failure at one of the two interconnected axles.
+. Trailer of more than 750 kg in weight or more than half of its prime mover weight shall be provided with
a separate automatic brake, and if it weighs more than 3500 kg, it shall be provided with a brake system,
which is controlled from the prime mover.
5. Any transport vehicle or trailer whose rear body height is more than 75 cm from the ground shall be
provided with safety devices to prevent other materials from entering into, or being caught, underneath.
6. Any brake installed at a vehicle shall be able to stop a fully loaded vehicle and safely stop a vehicle in a
steep incline or decline.
7. All vehicles shall be provided with sound signals. !f the rear vehicle's vision is restricted, it shall be
provided with automatic reversing alarm.
8. Operator's compartment window shall be made of safety glass and kept in clean condition. !f it is
exposed to any hazard from flying materials, such as fly rock, it shall be provided with external protective
metal grid.
9. !t is prohibited to change construction of an operator's compartment if the action reduces visibility.
10. !t is prohibited to operated vehicles during dark hours or when visibility is reduced due to bad weather,
except when the vehicles are provided with;
a. Sufficient lighting to allow the driver a safe front and rear visibility;
b. Lights or signs with sufficient illumination to indicate the vehicles' size:
c. Emergency warning lights.
11. Any operators' compartment shall be provided with safe door, and if the compartment floor is more than
1.8 meters from the ground, the cabin shall be provided with two safe exits.
12. All vehicles shall be provided with two rear mirrors, and wide body vehicles, whose rear vision is
restricted, shall be provided with supplementary rear mirror.
13. Operator compartment shall be constructed and provided with equipment, which can protect the operator
from excessive noise, dust and muffler smoke.
1+. Any vehicles or trailers, which are used in the mine and provided with tipping body, shall be provided
with a safety device, which prevents the body from falling when it is being tipped. This device shall be
separated from the tipping mechanical device and shall not be controlled from the operator's
compartment.
15. vehicles operated in areas, where hazard such as being turned upside-down or struck by fallen materials
are liable to occur, shall be provided with:
a. Sturdy ropes construction;
b. Safety belts for both operator and passengers; and
c. Passenger handrails.

Article 141
Transportation Road
1. Transportation road in mine area shall be clearly sign-posted. Every vehicle shall only use road
determined as transportation road.
2. Ninimum radius and maximum road gradient shall match the power of the vehicles
3. The open edge of a cliff shall be provided with safety beam
+. !f possible, road surface shall be provided with reinforcement layer to resist erosion and avoid slippage.
5. The surface of straight road shall be flat and the elevated part of a curve shall not cause instability to a
high axle or loaded vehicle.
6. Sufficient lighting shall be provided at workplaces and at strategic places along haul road to ensure
pedestrians' safety, especially if the haul road intersects a track.
7. Any haul road located under an obstacle shall be clearly sign posted, indicating the obstacle and its
clearance. Warning signs shall be posted where an aerial cable crosses over a haul road.

Article 142
Drivers' Requirements and Duties
1. To be eligible to drive at a mine area, someone shall satisfy the following requirements:
a. He is at least 18 years old;
b. He is appointed by the Kepala Teknik Tambang to drive certain vehicles;
c. He has attended training and is acknowledged competent by Kepala Teknik Tambang.
2. The operator of a vehicle equipped with tipping body shall ensure that the body when being tipped for a
purpose other than that for routine unloading, shall be secured by a separate device.
3. The driver shall use any means provided at unloading area to prevent the vehicles from overturning or
moving.
+. All drivers at a mine area shall obey traffic rules, which have been established by Kepala Teknik
Tambang.
5. Before leaving his vehicle, the operator shall ensure that the engine has been turned off and locked
securely to prevent the vehicle from being moved either intentionally or unintentionally by authorized
person.
6. On a decline, all vehicles except trailer shall always travel slowly and use low gears at all time.
7. Before moving his vehicle, the operator shall give sound signal and ensure the surrounding area is clear
from other personnel.
8. At the beginning of each shift, the operator shall perform a walk-around inspection and least the control
equipment, particularly break operation.

Article 143
Inspection and Maintenance
A maintenance schedule arranges inspection, inspection and repair of all vehicle used at the mine shall be
established.

Article 144
Safe Working Procedures
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall organize traffic routes in the mine and install necessary traffic sign to
inform the drivers of:
a. Traffic direction;
b. Speed limit;
c. vehicle's maximum height;
d. !ncline and decline: and
e. Parking" and No Parking" areas and other matters related to transportation system safety.
2. Traffic direction at loading, unloading and dumping points shall be one way.
3. Overtaking is allowable only at designated locations.
+. Nineworkers who are permitted to walk or present at haul road, or loading and unloading points shall
wear loud fluorescent vest.

Article 145
Dumping
1. Any waste or excavated material dumping work shall be under observation to ensure that the vehicles
remain at the designated areas;
2. vehicles shall not dump beyond the bench edge and there shall be a beam at the edge of dumping
boundary.
3. !f dumping is allowed at the bench edge, beam shall be established to prevent the vehicles from tipping
or driving over the bench edge.
+. Dumping work shall be observed by a spotter who shall direct dumping locations and observe reversing
vehicles and is responsible for the observation of slope stability in the dumping point.
5. Dumping shall not be conducted during dark hours or when the visibility is poor, except when the
workplace is equipped with lighting, which ensures safe and clear visibility.
6. At dumping point, the operator shall remain in the compartment.
7. Only spotters are allowed to be in a dumping area, and shall wear a loud fluorescent vest.

Article 146
Transportation Regulation
1. At every mine operation Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish regulations and traffic signs, including:
a. Safe vehicle operation;
b. Traffic direction, speed limit, and maximum load;
c. Hazardous and awkward load;
d. Service and towing vehicles;
e. Distance between vehicles;
f. Loading and unloading;
g. Pedestrian regulation;
h. Tire handling;
i. Passengers and workers transportation;
j. Training and driving license.
2. Transportation regulation shall be given to the Nine !nspector. The Chief Nine !nspector shall be
authorized to amend the regulation if he deems it necessary for workers' safety

Element 5
Conveyor Belt
Article 147
1. !t is prohibited to use production conveyor belt to transport personnel.
2. The Chief Nine !nspector shall acknowledge the use of conveyor belt for personnel transportation.
3. !f the conveyor belt sides are used as traffic road, the road shall be sufficiently illuminated and fenced to
protect the traffics from materials falling from the belt. The width of traffic road shall be at least 700 mm.
+. !t is prohibited to walk along the belt conveyor, except for maintenance purpose for which the belt shall
be stopped from operating and its power source isolated.
5. !t is prohibited to walk across a conveyor belt, except at certain points. Hand-railed crossing bridges shall
be available at interval of at least 500 meters along the conveyor belt.

Article 14S
Emergency Stop and Warning Equipment
1. Any conveyor belt shall be provided with emergency rope at easily accessible locations along the belt,
which function to stop the conveyor belt when it is pulled.
2. !f the overall length of the conveyor belt can be seen from operator console, the before being operated.
!n otherwise condition, audio or visual warning devices shall be installed and sounded or turned on
before commencement.
3. !f the conveyor belt is of automatic or remote-controlled design, it shall be operating in a sequence from
sending end to receiving end, and it shall be provided with pre-operation warning devices.
+. All automatic, tele-automatic and remote controls shall be provided with a device, which can cut out
electricity when a faulty operation exists.

Article 149
Safety Fence
1. Conveyor belt's head and tail pulleys shall be provided with safety fences with a height at least the same
as that of head pulley and tail pulley.
2. An elevated belt conveyor shall be provided with safety fence and, in the absence of it, access to the belt
conveyor shall only be restricted for maintenance and cleaning purposes.


Article 150
Maintenance
1. !t is prohibited to lift an operating conveyor belt, except when it is equipped with a mechanical lifting
device.
2. !t is prohibited to manually install a belt to an operating head pulley, except when the belt is operating
slowly and specially designed for manual installation.
3. !t is prohibited to perform manual cleaning to an operating belt and pulley. Remote greasing device shall
be available.
+. !t is prohibited to perform manual greasing to an operating conveyor belt, unless using a remote
greasing.
5. !t is prohibited to clean underside of an operating conveyor belt, unless the side is provided with safety
fence.

Article 151
Stacker and Spreader
1. Part of the stacker, spreader, and excavator, including the stairways and platform shall be cleaned at the
beginning of each shift.
2. Stacker and spreader shall be provided with properly operating measurement instrument, safety button,
and signal and communication devices. !n addition to automatic brake, undercarriage shall also be
provided with hand brake.
3. Stacker and spreader shall be provided with anemometer, which is connected to emergency signal and
wheel control and supporting chain system of the spreader.
+. Conveyor route at stacker and spreader shall be provided with stepping floor, with both sides fenced.
Counterweight nearby a traffic road shall be provided with safety fences.
5. When the spreader, either rubber tire or track mounted, is operating, haulage vehicle, machineries and
other equipment or pedestrian shall not be allowed to travel or walk beneath the stacker hoist.
6. Stacker shall be in a distance of not less than 1 meter to mine to a mine building or equipment, or
operate above mining equipment and other transportation equipment.
7. The distance between the tip of lateral conveyor at the stacker from the pile shall be at least three
meters. For spreader, which uses belt conveyor and periodically slewing hoist, the distance shall be at
least 1.5 meter. !f the pile shows a subsiding indication, the hoist shall be removed from the hazard area.
8. !n bad weather, storm, heavy rain or foggy conditions or when the visibility is less than 25 meters, the
workers or work operation at the stacker shall be stopped. !t is prohibited to travel the wheels or
supporting chain of the stacker when they are stagnated.
9. When performing maintenance on a stacker, automatic and underground brakes shall not be dismantled
simultaneously.

Element 7
Air Transportation
Article 152
1. Any requests to use water ways or wharf in a water system for personnel, material or minerals
transportation shall be forwarded to the Chief Nine !nspector, and enclosed with:
a. Copy of permit issued by authorized institution; and
b. Detailed maps of the location of the wharf.
2. Other matters not covered in the regulation issued by the authorized water traffic agency shall be
regulated by the Chief mine !nspector.
3. Unless otherwise regulated by the authorized water traffic agency, construction, maintenance and safety
standards of water vehicle operated by a mining company shall be the responsibility of the chief Nine
!nspector. The water vehicle shall be complying with this regulation and other necessary provisions.
Article 153
1. Any requests to use air transportation for transporting a mined materials or personnel, and any provisions
concerning airportfaerodrome facilities for aircraft or helicopter shall be forwarded to the Chief Nine
!nspector, and enclosed with:
a. Copy of permit issued by the authorized agency; and
b. Detailed map of location of the airport or aerodrome.
2. Other matters related to air transportation or mine airport or aerodrome, which are not covered in the
regulations of related air traffic institution, shall be the responsibility of the Chief Nine !nspector.

Element S
Lifting Machine

Article 154
Construction, Equipment and Installation
1. Any lifting machine shall be rigidly constructed, made of suitable material, free from any defects, of
sufficient capacity to lift its intended load, and well maintained.
2. Any lifting machines shall be provided with:
a. Safe entrance and exit for operator's movement in and out of the cabin fitted to the machine.
b. Hazard signal, which warns personnel of a moving lifting machine.
3. Any electrical lifting machine shall be provide with:
a. Nain power disconnect or; and
b. Powers disconnect or which can out electric current although the machine is in its maximum lifting
power, except when the collector can be released safely.
+. Any mechanical lifting machine used in amine shall be provided with efficient catch or broke.
5. Safe capacity of each lifting machine shall be clearly written on the machine.
6. Any lifting machine shall be equipped with an automatic load indicator or a device which can indicate
working load at a certain angle or radius.
7. Loader and excavator can be used as a lifting machine under the following conditions:
a. Front bucket loader shall have ringed bolt which is permanently fixed, and tested, and its lifting
capacity shall be written on it.
b. Backhoe shall be equipped with ringbolt, which is fixed permanently, tested at its outset radius, and
its safe lifting capacity shall be written on it.
8. Forklift and similar lifting equipment which is capable of lifting a load to a point above the operator's head
or is operated at a pile which is higher than the operator's head shall be provided with a canopy.
9. !t is prohibited to set up a lifting machine after being dismantled or moved except by a qualified person
in accordance with O.E.N. `s specification.
10. Any rail or railway for a mobile shall be of sufficient size, well placed, flat and maintained properly.

Article 155
Safe Work Procedures
1. Workplace for lifting machine should be kept flat, clean, and inspected by an authorized person.
2. A lifting machine or tackle shall be used in accordance with the manufacturer's specification or its lifting
capacity.
3. !t is forbidden to overstrain a lifting machine or tackle, except for testing purposes by a competent
person.
+. !f a load shall be lifted with more than one lifting machine, personnel in charge should be appointed to
ensure that none of the lifting machines is overstrained.
5. Nobile lifting machine shall travel on a flat, hard and asphalted road by using the lowest gear (maximum
3 KPH), and the load shall be directly in front of the operator. Lifting machine may not be used to pull a
load.
6. !f a lifting machine is equipped with outrigger or stabilizer, it shall be rigidly set up when lifting, slewing
or lowering a load.
7. The operation of a lifting machine when lifting a load shall follow instructions of the signalman.
8. !f audio or visual signals cannot be used, communication between operator and the signalman shall be
done by radio.
9. !f the mobile lifting machine is controlled from the ground by using remote control, operator's track on
the floor should always be clear and free from any obstacles.

Article 156
Preventive Measures
1. !t is prohibited to lift a person by lifting machine or to have a person ride on a load being lifted.
2. The provisions referred to in paragraph (1) shall not be applicable to the use of man-caged lifting
machine to lift a person for a special purpose, which shall be in accordance with the work procedures
acknowledge by the Chief Nine !nspector.
3. !t is prohibited to ride on a lifting machine, except for operator or repairman, tester, and maintenance
personnel. !t is prohibited to lift a person by using a lifting machine, which is being under repair, test,
and maintenance.
+. When a lifting machine is under repair, test and maintenance, the operator shall only follow instructions
of the appointed person.
5. !t is prohibited to be in the vicinity of a suspended load or within swing radius.
6. !t is prohibited to operate a lifting machine if the damage strains of its rope are more than 5 , or when
there is a defect, which significantly reduces its strength.

Article 157
Working Close to Aerial Cable
1. A very cautions action shall be taken when operating a mobile lifting machine close to aerial cable; and
the operation shall be guided by signalman standing on the ground, and performed during daytime or
when the weather is good.
2. None of the parts of a lifting machine or its load shall be allowed to approach a life aerial cable in a
distance less than:

Cable voltage (Kv) Ninimum Clearance
Up to 66
> 66
3.0 meter
5.0 meter

3. Crossing under an aerial cable shall only be allowable at certain point. Before crossing under the cable,
jib shall be lowered and lifting lever be locked and tied to prevent the jib from moving unintentionally.
+. !f it is required to move the lifting machine across a non-permissible point, the operator shall obtain prior
approval from Kepala Teknik Tambang.
5. !n the event that the jib contacts an aerial cable, operator shall remain on the machine until the jib is
released from the cable or the current cut out. The operator shall ensure that no one on the ground will
touch the lifting machine, and operator shall only leave the machine by jumping.

Article 15S
Inspection and Testing
1. A specialist shall ultrasonically test the axle of lifting machine's prime mover for good condition before
commencement, or regularly with a frequency the same as or more than that specified by the
manufacturer.
2. Equipment which can influence the safe operation of the lifting machine shall be tested, maintained and
inspected by a specialist before commencement, and regularly with a frequency the same as or more
than that specified by the manufacturer.
3. The operator shall perform walk-around inspection and test the function of workload indicator and safety
devices at the beginning of each shift.
+. Lifting machine shall be inspected by qualified person with the following intervals:
a. For tower crane, at least after seven days operation or after a storm which might have influenced the
stability of the lifting machine; and
b. For other types of crane, at least after seven days operation, and for stationary carne, after any
movement or location transfer.
5. Any lifting machine or tackle which is used in a mining activity shall be inspected and tested regularly to
ensure its safe workload at least every 12 months by an authorized specialist whose name is registered in
the Nine Book, or workshop appointed by Kepala Teknik Tambang.
6. The appointed person or institution referred to in paragraph (5) shall issue an attestation, and report all
defects found and make record in the Nine Book. !f a defect, which may affect safety in lifting machine
or tackle, is found, the lifting machine shall not be use before it is repaired and re-tested.

Section Five
Workshop and Factory

Article 159
General Provisions
Any workshop shall be operated with good housekeeping in order not to create safety and health hazard, and
not to disturb or pollute the environment.

Article 160
Housekeeping
1. Space among machineries, mechanical equipment, stools, workbenches and other working equipment
should be wide and free from any obstacles for operators' easy and free movement.
2. One of the stairway sides shall be provided with at least one rigid handrails or support. Portable ladder
shall be tied and hooked safely.
3. Hatchway and stairway shall be provided with a 90 cm high frame or fence. Deck and stairways shall be
free from any obstacles and slippery materials.
+. An open container, which contains hot or hazard liquid, shall be separated with curtains or fences of at
least 1.5 meter high. The location shall be provided with conspicuous hazard notice.

Article 161
Housekeeping
1. !t is prohibited to use flame at the workshop, except when the natures of works demand it and where
sufficient safety equipment is available
2. Rags covered with oil or other flammable liquids shall be properly stored in a fire hazard free location.
3. !f a flammable liquid is transferred from a container, the container shall be of fireproof design and its
capacity shall not be more than 20 liters. !t is prohibited to store more than 10 containers, all containing
flammable liquids, in a workshop.
+. !f a work is liable to explosion hazard, the working room and its adjoining rooms shall be free from fire or
naked flame, and may only be illuminated with gas-proof lamp. Naked flame and non-gas proof lamps
shall not be use within a minimum distance of 10 meters from the working room. The working room shall
be well ventilated, or mechanically ventilated where necessary.
5. !t is prohibited to smoke in or bring incendiary devices into the workshop referred to in paragraph (+)
here of.
6. Equipment and materials within the workshop shall be arranges properly in order not to obstruct the fire
exits.
7. Every workshop shall be provided with suitable and sufficient fire extinguishers.

Article 162
Safety Measures Against Hazardous Vapor and Gas
1. Workshop shall be equipped with a sound ventilation system, and hazardous gas and vapor, which
endanger workers' health and safety, shall be prevented from spreading. !f due to the natures of work,
hazardous gas and vapor are inevitable, the ventilation system shall be designed and installed to expel
the gaseous vapor.
2. !t is forbidden to enter a workshop room, which might contain hazardous vapor and gas before it is
inspected for safety and declared safe.

Article 163
Safety Equipment
1. Noving parts of any machines or transmission equipment, which may create any hazard, shall be
equipped with safety device.
2. Any high-speed rotating parts of machine shall be guarded safely, and the rotation shall not exceed the
specification.
3. Every worker shall wear safety goggles when:
a. Working on a machine which can produce sparks or spatters.
b. Working on a task, which produces a glaring and eye-harmful light.

Article 164
Use of Drive Motor and Engine
1. Prior to starting a drive motor, a clear warning signal shall be given to workers who are exposed to
operation hazard. Automatically operated engine shall be provided with audio or visual warning signals.
2. !f the locations between the drive motor and control room is quite distant, effective emergency stops
shall be installed to ensure that everybody can stop the operation at anytime necessary.

Article 165
Grinding Machine
1. Grinding stone shall be:
a. Provided with safety ring when installed;
b. Protected with safety guard; and
c. Equipped with a shield-glass
2. The size and type of grinding stone shall match the manufacturer's specification.
3. Grinding machine rotation speed shall not exceed the manufacturer's specification.
+. Grinding machine operator shall wear safety goggles.

Article 166
Painting
Painting room or workplace shall be closed and well ventilated with exhausting fan. The workplace shall be
illuminated with air-tight lamp, and the workers shall wear suitable mask.



Article 167
General Provisions
1. Workers who are not protected form glares resulted by welding or cutting work shall wear safety goggles
and other safety equipment.
2. !f the welding and cutting work produce toxic metal fumes, the wielding room shall be sufficiently
ventilated, and personnel exposed to the toxic fumes shall wear respiratory protector.
3. !t is prohibited to perform welding and cutting work if other personnel are exposed to weld glare, except
when they wear eye protection equipment or separated by protection curtain.
+. Suitable fire extinguishers shall always be available when welding or cutting is in progress.
5. !t is prohibited to weld, cut or heat a metal nearby flammable or combustible material or gas.
6. During welding, cutting or heating works, the flame or spark shall be prevented from contacting gas
cylinder, regulator valve and hose.
7. !mmediately after the welding or cutting work is completed, gasfoxygen cylinder's valve shall be capped
and the remaining pressure at regulator valve, hoses, and welding handle shall be released prior to
leaving the welding room. A careful inspection against flame or spark shall be conducted prior to leaving
the welding room.
8. Kepala Teknik Tambang or the appointed person shall issue a permit for welding or cutting work in a
welding room, which is liable to instantaneous explosion or fire. The permit shall be applicable only on
the issuance day, and fire hazard precautions shall be observed until the work permitted is completed.

Working Using Welding Equipment

Article 16S
Welding Using Pressurized or Liquefied gas
{Oxy-acetylene or Propane Welding)
1. Gas cylinder shall handle with care and protected from falling, crushing with other cylinders, and
excessive head and cold.
2. Gas cylinder shall be stored carefully and tied securely to prevent it against falling, and away from fire
source or flammable material, especially oil and grease.
3. Full and empty gas cylinders shall be stored separately, and the empty ones should be labeled. The
cylinders shall be used according to their receipt order.
+. Pressurized gasfoxygen cylinder, regulator, hoses and other accessories shall not be in contact with oily
or greasy rags, and be kept away from oil, fuel, grease or flammable materials. Cleanliness is a pre-
requisite in equipment maintenance.
5. Gas cylinder shall be transported with care by using special equipment, and may not be rolled. !f it is
transported by crane, a safe gondola shall be used.
6. Safety cap shall always be securely installed if the gas cylinder is not in use.
7. Gas cylinder shall only be used when equipped with necessary safety equipment, particularly pressure
regulator valve.
8. The valve shall not be directed to a person when the safety cap has been opened but pressure regulator
valve has not yet been installed. Safety cap shall be cleaned from dust or dirt prior to opening. The valve
shall remain closed before the pressure regulator valve is opened, even when the cylinder is empty. The
valve shall be opened slowly by using special tool and the key shall always be attached to the cylinder
when the welding is in progress.
9. Prior to performing any oxyacetylene and propane welding, inspection and testing shall be performed.
Cylinder whose leakage cannot be stopped by closing the valve or tightening the joints shall be emptied
in an open air, away from fire source. Repair of any damaged cylinder shall be performed by an
authorized workshop.


Article 169
Container Welding and Cutting
1. !t is prohibited to weld or cut explosive or flammable substance container, except after:
a. The molten metal vapor and gas, and gaseous and dusty vapor in the container are cleaned, or
b. The molten metal substance and vapor, gas, and gaseous and dusty vapor in the container are
neutralized.
2. !t is prohibited to put explosive and flammable substances into a newly welded container before it is cold
enough to prevent the substances from igniting.
3. Prior to welding a hole in an oily or greasy container, the container shall be filled with water and its cap is
opened.

Article 170
Open Container
1. Tank, drum or other liquid containers whose top edge height is less 1.5 meter from the floor, the gantry
or working platform shall be tightly closed and provided with a fence of at least 1.5 meter high to prevent
any person from falling into.
2. !t is prohibited to get into the containers referred to in paragraph (1) hereof, except when safety
measures have been taken to ensure that:
a. The tank is empty and its passage is closed and locked;
b. The container has been flushed with water or air to neutralize residual liquid or soda, irritating
substances or flammable gas-containing vapor.
c. A buddy shall attend every maintenance work within the container.
d. Personnel entering the container shall wear safety belt or harness, which is tied outside the container
and attended by a buddy.

Article 171
Pile Inspection
1. Ore or other material piles shall be inspected by an authorized person to ensure safe work environment
condition before allowing someone to work at or near the pile.
2. !t is prohibited to work at or near hazardous piles of excavated material.

Article 172
Pile Inspection
!t is prohibited to work at an area where someone is working overhead, except when safety measures have
been taken against falling objects, in accordance with the work natures.

Article 173
Passage or Path
1. Passage or path within a factory shall be sufficiently wide, properly maintained, and free from any
obstacles to allow the workers' free movement.
2. Any man openings on the floor or at other surfaces within a factory shall be:
a. Protected by a safety fence of at least 1 meter high; or
b. Closed with a solid tight wood or other materials capable of withstanding loads impact.

Article 174
Protection Against Fire Hazards
1. Any factory workers who are handling hot molten metal shall be equipped with personal protective
equipment and other necessary equipment and other necessary equipment to protect them against fire or
heat radiation.
2. During the work, the workers referred to in paragraph (1) are obliged to wear and maintain personal
protective equipment and other available equipment.

Article 175
Aids Equipment
1. At a workplace where toxic and noxious gas or vapor accumulates, detector shall be stationed at certain
locations, and the approved type of portable breathing apparatus and resuscitating equipment shall be
supplied in sufficient quantity.
2. At each shift, there shall be one or more trained personnel who isfare capable of using breathing
apparatus and resuscitating equipment.
3. The personnel referred to in paragraph (2) shall be determined by the Kepala Teknik Tambang.

Article 176
Hot Substance Molding
1. Hot substances or molten metal shall be prevented from contacting cold, humid or rough surfaces if the
contact results in an accident.
2. Ladles and slag pots shall be inspected before being used to handle the hot molten metal.
3. !f using mechanical equipment transports the molten metal, the surface of the molten metal shall not be
less than 10cm from its container lids.
+. Failure to fulfill the provisions referred to in paragraph (3), the container can only be moved after a
warning sign has been given to the transport personnel and other personnel near by.
5. Warning sign shall be given prior to pouring the molten metal in container and prior to moving the
container.
6. Every operator of hot molten metal digging equipment shall obtain a permit form the furnace supervisor
prior to digging into the slag pot.

Article 177
Any transportation Equipment used to transport hot molten metal shall be provided with a sound signal, or
automatic signal, which shall be sounded when the transport equipment is moving.

Article 17S
Preventive Measures At the Furnace
1. !t is prohibited to climb an operating rot grate floor without any permission from the supervisor or
personnel- in- charge. The supervisor shall ensure that the worker(s) is (are) always attended by a buddy
to give hazard signal and aids in case of gas or other hazards.
2. The provisions referred to in paragraph (1) shall not be applicable when the rot grate is in a distance
from the furnace and a direct exit from the building is available.
3. Ready-for-use safety belt shall be available at an easily accessible location near the furnace top.
+. Fuel-feeding opening shall be provided with safe platform of at least one meter high, and the platform
shall be provided with protective support to protect the platform against excessive heat, and stairway
shall be provided from the base floor to the work floor.
5. Two-way communication radio or telephone shall be available at the furnace top or other hazardous
areas to the cast house, control room or constantly attended room.
6. !f the fuel is plugged or lump up at the furnace hopper and it needs to be worker shall wear safety
devices or working attire.


Article 179
Supervision of Hazardous Work Around the Furnace
1. Every supervisor shall supervise personally or appoint personnel responsible for supervising any works
around the furnace, where a particular accident might occur.
2. When working out of the routine maintenance work or performing minor repair other at the furnace top,
the following requirement shall apply:
a. Nolten metals shall be quenched and the furnace area shall be free from other personnel;
b. The work shall be instructed by the supervisor;
c. Prior to the repair work, the workplace area shall be inspected for hazardous or toxic gas, and re-
inspection shall be performed as frequent as necessary to protect the workers; and
d. Breathing apparatus, harness and other necessary safety equipment shall be available.

Section Six
Electrical Equipment and Machineries

Article1S0
General Provisions
1. Unless the Chief Nine !nspector stipulates regulations or standards otherwise regulated herein, all
electrical plants shall comply with the provisions of General Guidelines for Electrical Plants (PU!L),
!ndonesian National Standard (SN!), and other related provisions.
2. All standards and definition contained in regulation referred to in paragraph (1) shall also be applicable.
3. Chart of high voltage electric system and detailed development plan for each mine operation shall be
forwarded to the Chief Nine !nspector, and any amendment and addition shall be reported.
+. Any electrical equipment on the ground level, which is controlled by, or share circuit with underground
equipment, shall comply with underground electrical provisions.

Article 1S1
Person On-Duty and Person In-Charge
1. An electrician registered in the Nine Book shall inspect all electrical works.
2. Those shall only perform electrical work familiar with electricity.

Article 1S2
Safe Work and Equipment System
1. Construction of all electrical equipment shall comply with the requirements to ensure that they can
prevent hazards and shall be maintained in safe condition.
2. Any activities, including maintenance of electrical system or work nearby the system shall be performed
properly to prevent any hazards.
3. Any safety devices intended for complying with the regulation herein shall be in accordance with its
intended use, maintained in safe condition and use properly.

Article 1S3
Electrical equipment shall be protected against:
a. Nechanical failure;
b. !mpacts of weather, natural disaster, temperature or pressure;
c. !mpacts of wetting, dirt, dust or corrosive condition; or
d. Flammable and explosive substances such as dust and gaseous vapor.



Article 1S4
Insulation and safety of Conductor
1. All conductors in electrical plants which can generate hazards shall be:
a. Completely insulated and protected; or
b. Properly installed and protected against any hazards.
2. !f it is not practical to install individual protection, such as resistance banks for each conductor, a
collective metal safety fence shall be installed and properly connected to the earthling system to prevent
any possibility of contacting a life part.

Article 1S5
Earthling and Other Protective Measures
1. Protective measures either by ear thing or other measures shall be taken to prevent any hazard when an
open conductive part is energized due to a system or insulation failure.
2. !f a conductive part of a circuit is earthed or connected to an ear thing point, which may result in a
hazard, when a failure occurs or when connection to ear thing point is cut out, it is prohibited to put
anything at the conductive part.
3. Nain ear thing connection shall be designed by electrician and shall have sufficient capacity and low
resistant. Double connection system shall be connected to each other with the same potential.

Article 1S6
Connection
Any connection within the system shall be made properly to ensure an easy use either mechanically or
electrically and hazard-free condition at normal use.

Article 1S7
Fuse
1. Any electrical plants shall be equipped with efficient and correctly placed fuse.
2. Trail cable, which conducts electrical current to a moving equipment, shall be protected by individual fuse
against over current or short circuit.

Article 1SS
Circuit Breaker and Protective Insulator
1. A suitable circuit breaker, which can break any electrical connection to and from any electrical equipment,
shall be available including suitable work system to identify the circuit.
2. The provisions referred to in paragraph (1) letter (a) shall not be applicable to self-generating electrical
equipment, but suitable preventive measures shall still be taken to prevent any hazards.
3. !n addition to a circuit breaker, every electrical equipment shall be provided with a separate insulator
nearby the equipment. High and low current sides of the transformer shall be provided with an individual
insulator.
+. Small lamp or electrical equipment shall use a single circuit breaker of not more than 10 amperes and be
protected by a switch.
5. Nain electric relay station and all primary stations on the surface or station which control underground
circuit shall be connected one to another by phone.
6. At every junction of an electrical system, an insulator switch shall be available in order to separate the
junction from the main system.


Article 1S9
Circuit Breaker to Underground Circuit
1. !f an underground mine needs electrical current from an electrical source on the mine surface, the main
switch to conduct current to underground mine shall be located at the surface.
2. Sufficient provisions shall be established in handling the switch referred to in paragraph (1) including its
communication equipment to ensure that the main switch can be operated in any hazardous condition.

Article 190
Working Actions Prior to Working on a Shut-off Electrical Equipment
Prior to working on or near electrical equipment having been shut off, preventive measures shall be taken by
locking the main switch handle and observing the provisions determined by the electrician.

Article 191
Working On or Near A Life Line
1. !t is prohibited to work on or near a life bare line, except on a special case, which complies with the safe
work procedures from the Kepala Teknik Tambang.
2. Special regulations on the safety of electrical welding work shall be established by an electrician and
approved by the Kepala Teknik Tambang.

Article 192
Workroom, Entrance, and Lighting
1. Workroom and entrance, including areas nearby electrical equipment, which is under repair, shall be
sufficiently illuminated.
2. Each permanent electrical equipment shall be located in an ample and enclosed room, unless determined
otherwise by the Chief Nine !nspector.
3. Electrical equipment shall be protected against water drop or seepage.
+. Electrical equipment shall be always be clean and dry;
5. !f the room contains coal dust, all electrical machines and equipment shall be protected with dust-tight
cap.

Article 193
Authority to Operate Electrical Equipment
1. The Kepala Teknik Tambang or personnel in-charge of electricity shall appoint a mineworker to operate
and watch electrical machine.
2. The provisions referred to in paragraph (1) shall not be applicable to electrical machines or equipment,
which are equipped with automatic safety devices.

Article 194
Electrical Equipment Labeling
1. All electrical equipment and apparatus shall be provided with rustproof metal label indicating its power
rating, voltage, current, manufacturer, type, and serial number.
2. For electric engine other than the provisions referred to in paragraph (1), the label shall also indicate
engine rpm (rotation per minute).



Article 195
Circuit Diagram
1. Schematic diagram of the circuit of all systems operated in a mine with the power more than 300 volts
(250 volts for underground mine) shall be available, and the scheme shall show the location of each
safety device.
2. All of the schemes shall be kept in the mine office and available at anytime for inspection by the Nine
!nspector.
3. The copy of schematic diagram which is related to the use of main switch of more than 300 volts capacity
(250 volts for underground mine) shall be installed at the main switch.

Article 196
Electric Locomotive
1. Fuse and other safety devices at every electric locomotive and current source shall always be in good
condition and inspected periodically by a personnel whose name is registered in the Nine Book.
2. !t is prohibited to set an automatic circuit breaker to a load exceeding the manufacturer's specification.
3. Locomotive shall only be left unguarded when the key switch and control handle have been disconnected
from its socket.
+. Any circuit receiving current form trail cable shall be safely connected to the ear thing circuit.

Article 197
Telephone
1. !t is prohibited to use telephone during the lightning.
2. Every phone installed at an open space shall be stationed at watertight box, with its metal frame earthed.
3. !t is prohibited to install telephone cable in circuit used for underground telephone.

Article 19S
Protection Against Lightning
1. Lightning arrester shall be installed at the end of all electrical conductors leading to an underground
mine.
2. Where necessary, electrical plants shall be provided with lightning arrester of sufficiently safe capacity.
3. The lightning arrester plant shall be inspected every six months or anytime after a forceful lightning
occurs.
+. Electrical circuit system and telephone on the mine surface which is connected to underground system
shall be provided with a lightning arrester in a distance not less than 80 meters from entrance way to
underground mine.
5. The connection from each earthling conductor of the lightning arrester shall be separated from other
earthling system in the mine. !n a clearance of at least 3 meters in the air and 25 meters under the
ground.

Article 199
Aerial Line Safety
1. Clearance from the ground to an aerial line shall not be less than:
a. 5.8 meters for public or regular roads or 5.0 meters of other roads shall be applicable for up to 300
volts AC (600 volts DC); and
b. 6 meters for public road and 5.8 meters for other roads of up to 300 volts AC (600 volts DC).
2. Warning sign or safety portal shall be installed at an aerial line which intersects a transportation road,
and in a distance not less than 12 meters from the nearest line at each direction leading to the line.
3. !t is prohibited to perform soil digging, dumping or removal works in a distance of 25 meters from any
buried electrical line, trail cablefcable, except when the current has been shut off or when Kepala Teknik
Tambang or technician has given permit or advice on the work methods and safety.

Article 200
Trail Cable
1. Trail cable shall be properly connected to the machine or to protect the cable from any damage and
prevent the conductor from any elongation.
2. Any excessive trail cable at the vehicle or similar equipment shall be stored neatly at the vehicle cable
roller and in the cable box protect the cable from any mechanical failure.
3. !f the cable cannot be prevented from crossing transportation road, the cable shall be suspended in
accordance with the provisions applicable to the aerial line and protected with strong iron guard to
prevent any damage caused the passing vehicle.
+. Any operating vehicle, which is driven by trail cable, shall not be left unguarded.
5. Trail cable driving the vehicle shall contain an integrated conductor with sufficient capacity.
6. Rubber gloves and boots shall be worn in handling high-voltage trail cable.

Article 201
1. The electrician shall ensure that the Chief Nine !nspector shall acknowledge the type of laser beam
utilized in a mine.
2. The electrician shall establish a safe method for using laser beams.

Article 202
Hand Tools
!t is prohibited to utilize hand tools with the capacity of more than 125 volts DC and 220 volts AC in a mine.

Article 203
Warning Sign
1. At workplaces where permanent electrical equipment, except electric cable, connection box, remote
control switch and signaling equipment are available, clear and understandable notice shall be installed.
The notices shall cover:
a. Resuscitation procedures of an electrocuted casualty and safe methods for releasing an electrocuted
person from a life line;
b. General fire instruction; and
c. Prohibition for anyone, except authorized person, to handle or touch electric equipment.
2. Warning signs on automatic equipment and the signs showing telephone booths and other
telecommunication means shall be installed.
3. Electric equipment, including connection box of more than 1200 volts shall be clearly sign-posted
indicating the equipment's voltage.
+. A sign indicating prohibition to bring naked flame shall be installed at the charging station door.
5. Every equipment switch and circuit breaker shall be clearly labeled indicating equipment which are
controlled or protected by the switch and circuit breaker.
6. The provisions referred to in paragraph (5) shall not be applicable to lamp switch, belt conveyor's control
switch and signal control switch.
7. The warning sign shall be made of durable materials, installed at visible location and well maintained.


Article 204
Inspection, Testing and Maintenance
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that the plan for electric plant inspection, testing, and maintenance
which are prepared by an electrician will ensure that all electric plants will always be in safe operation.
2. A qualified person with an interval of not more than 6 months shall regularly inspect the electric plant.
The results of inspection shall be recorded in the Electric Book.
3. Any changes in electric plants shall also be recorded in the Electric Book on electric plant scheme.

Article 205
Duties and Responsibilities
1. Workers who are not assigned to repair nor inspect electric equipment and install electric cables shall be
prohibited to do the works.
2. !t is prohibited to perform repair and other jobs at low voltage equipment or installation work of electric-
carrying cables except when under supervision of a competent person, and he shall wear suitable
protective equipment.

Element 2
Machinery

Article 206
General Provisions
Nachines, including parts and working gears shall be installed and anchored rigidly at a strong base and
maintained properly.

Article 207
Machinery and Machine Room
1. !t is prohibited to enter or to be nearby a machine room, except for the assigned person.
2. The prohibition referred to in paragraph (1) shall be clear and installed at machine room's entrance way.
3. Every machine room shall be provided with sufficient lighting and ventilation and kept clean.
+. !t is prohibited to store rags or flammable materials or hazardous liquids in the machine room.

Article 20S
Machinery Layout
1. Nachinery shall be arranged in a good layout, which allows an ample and obstacle-free path between
machinery and the wall.
2. Piping of air, vapor, water, and other materials shall be properly installed and protected.

Article 209
Safety Protection Equipment
1. Noving parts of all machinery shall be provided with sufficiently strong protective fences.
2. Flywheel, transmission teeth, drive wheels, transmission chain, shaft and transmission shaft and other
rotating parts which may cause a hazard shall be enclosed with cage or safety guard.
3. Any high-speed rotating parts which are liable to breakage and being thrown away shall be sealed or
guarded safely.
+. A machine which is not equipped with safety guard and safety protection equipment during run-in period
shall be provided with hazard sign and safe working procedures shall be observed.
5. Gantry of more than 1.2 m high from the floor, which is used for oiling or similar functions, shall be
provided with handrails.

Article 210
Machine Handling
1. Workers working close to a moving machine shall wear tight clothes.
2. Nachines driven by a prime mover shall allow independent start and stop.
3. !t is prohibited to install and remove a transmission belt to and from a moving or operating machine.
+. Nachines driven by a prime mover shall only be started or stopped after a warning sign is given to all
mechanics or machine attendants' on-duty.
5. The machine attendants are not allowed to leave an operating machine.
6. !t is prohibited to start a machine, apparatus or transmission equipment that may endanger other
personnel due to electric or moving part hazards. Prior to performing repair work on electrical appliances,
the repairman shall ensure that switch or connecting switch of the appliance has been shut off and
locked.

Article 211
Machine Maintenance
1. !t is prohibited to grease or lubricate an operating machine, except when the machines are equipped with
automatic or remote lubrication system.
2. The cleaning of a drive shaft of an operating machine shall only be allowed by the use of special device.

Article 212
Hazard Warning Sign
Clear and visible warning signs shall be installed at certain locations nearby a hazardous equipment or
appliance.
Article 213
Inspection
1. All machinery and equipment shall be regularly inspected in accordance with the schedule determined by
the Kepala Teknik Tambang.
2. The results of inspection referred to in paragraph (1) shall be recorded in the logbook.

Element 3
Compressor

Article 214
General Provisions
1. The air sucked into the compressor shall be clean and dry.
2. The compressor shall be provided with air filter.
3. The temperature of pressurized air within the compressor shall be more than +0 C below flash point of
the compressor's lubricating oil.
+. !f the temperature of pressurized air referred to in paragraph (3) or in case of any failure at the
compressor's cooling element, its operation shall be stopped by the operator.
5. The flow of pressurized air from compressor to intended spaces shall be kept as dry and cool as possible.


Article 215
Construction and Safety Devices
1. Pressurized air vessel, which has excessive, shall have at least safety factors of five times allowable
safety factors.
2. All pipe constructions and the couplings shall always be able to resist air pressure and flow.
3. Every compressor and vessel shall be provided with a safety device to keep the stability at allowable
maximum pressure. The device shall include thermometer, manometer, and excessive pressure release
valve.
+. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall determine the maximum pressure of working air and it shall be clearly
written on each compressor and pressurized water vessel.

Article 216
Lubricating Oil
1. Compressor lubricating oil shall be of high grade with the flash point above 200 C.
2. The Nine !nspector can take samples of compressor's waste oil for its flash point at the expense of the
mining company.

Article 217
Inspection, Testing, and Repair
1. The compressor shall be inspected and repaired when necessary, annually or at the latest of every 8000
hours of operation.
2. The results of inspection and repair referred to in paragraph (1) shall be recorded in a special book,
together with suggestions and comments.
3. Once in every five years, a thorough inspection shall be performed on the parts of pressurized vessel of
at least 1 meter in diameter, which is used for pressure air of maximum pressure of 8 atm.
+. When needed, based on the results of inspection referred to in paragraph (3), the vessel strength shall
be tested by putting pressurized water into the vessel with the pressure of at least 3.5 atm above the
allowable air pressure for the vessel.
5. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall report the inspection results to the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 21S
Steam Boiler
All equipment, plant system, and the use of steam boiler in a mine operation shall comply with the prevailing
provisions on steam boiler.

Section Seven
Liquid Fuel Storage
Article 219
1. Storage area of combustible liquid fuel whose capacity is equal to those referred to in article 221
paragraph (2) shall obtain a permit from the Chief Nine !nspector.
2. Liquid fuel can be classified into:
a. Flammable liquid, that is liquid fuel whose flash point is below 37.5 C and vapor pressure is not more
than 2.+8 psi, and
b. Combustible liquid that is liquid whose flash point equal to or above 37.8

C.

Article 220
1. Flammable liquid referred to in article 219 paragraph (2) letter (a) shall be classified into:
a. Class ! A fuel with flash point below 22.8 C and boiling point below 37.8 C;
b. Class ! B liquid fuel with flash point below 22.8 C and boiling point equal to or below 37.8 C; and
c. Class ! C liquid fuel with flash point equal to or above 22.8 C and boiling point below 60 C
2. Combustible liquid referred to in article 219 paragraph (2) letter b shall be classified into:
a. Class !! A liquid fuel with flash point equal to or above 37.5 C and boiling point below 60 C;
b. Class !! B liquid fuel with flash point equal to or above 60 C and boiling point below 93 C;
c. Class !! C liquid fuel with flash point equal to or above 93 C

Article 221
1. Liquid fuel storage area, which consists of one tank or a cluster of tanks to store 5.000-+0.000 liters of
combustible liquid fuel, or 1.000-10.000 liter of flammable liquid fuel, shall not necessarily obtain a
permit from the Chief Nine !nspector.
2. Liquid fuel storage area which consists of one tank or a cluster of tanks to store more than +0.000 liters
of combustible liquid fuel and more than 10.000 liters of flammable liquid fuel shall obtain permit from
the Chief Nine !nspector.
3. Permit for storage area referred to in paragraph (2) shall be applicable for five years, and can be
extended.

Article 222
Liquid fuel storage area referred to in article 221 shall fulfill the provisions herein.

Article 223
1. Every liquid fuel storage area shall be provided with:
a. No Smoking" and Authorized Personnel Only" signs;
b. Lighting lamps;
c. Fire fighting equipment; and
d. Lightning arrester.
2. Tank foundation shall be made of concrete construction and capable of supporting the tank and its
content.
3. !f the storage area consists of a cluster of tanks, the distance of a tank to another shall be at least 10
meters.
+. !f the distance referred to in paragraph (3) is less than 10 meters, every tank shall be provided with
water spray plant.
5. The Storage tank or the cluster of storage tanks shall be surrounded by concrete or soil bund and its
height shall accommodate:
a. One storage tank = a maximum capacity of the tank plus 20 cm; and
b. A cluster of storage tanks = a half of the total capacity of all tanks plus 20 cm.
6. Lightning arrester installed at the liquid fuel storage area shall be tested for earthling resistant every six
months or anytime after a powerful lightning occurs.
7. At the top of liquid storage tank, a gas relief pipe shall be installed and provided with at least three layers
of brass screen.
8. Tank number, capacity and type of content shall be written on the wall of liquid fuel storage tank.
9. Charging pipe at a liquid fuel storage area shall be in a distance of at least 10 meters from outlet pipe.
10. Liquid fuel storage area referred to in article 221 shall be provided with safety fences in a distance of 5
meters from safety bund, and the fences shall be provided with a lockable gate.
11. Electric and pump panels shall be located outside the safety fences.

Article 224
Storage in Non Permanent Tank
!f a drum or similar container is used to store less than 5.000 liters combustible liquids and less than 1.000
liters flammable liquids, the storage area shall be surrounded by lockable gate.

Article 225
Minimum Safety Clearance
Liquid fuel storage tank shall fulfill the following minimum safety clearance:

Article 226
Tank Construction
The construction of liquid fuel storage tank shall fulfill the following requirements:
a. Nade of fire resistant materials;
b. Nade of recognized iron plate;
c. vertical, rigid and stable;
d. Able to retain the content and free from any leakage during the storage; and
e. Plate joints at the wall shall be welded, riveted or bolted or combination of both.

Article 227
Underground Storage
Underground storage shall fulfill the following requirements:
a. The tank shall be made of rust-proof materials or its inner and outer part is rust-proof layered, and
provided with outlet pipe;
b. The tank shall be buried at least 1 meter deep, measured from the upper part of the tank, and all digging
works around the tank shall be filled with sand;
c. The tank shall be able to resist atmospheric pressure of 7 atm;
d. The tank shall not be buried beneath train rails or roads;
e. Filling pipe shall be at least 10 meters from the outlet pipe; and
f. There shall not be any naked flame or lamp around the filling pipe.


























CHAPTER V
DRILLING

Article 22S
Procedures
1. The Kepala Teknik Tambang or personnel-in-charge of the drilling work shall establish drilling procedures
in accordance with drilling machine used.
2. Operational and technical supervisor shall ensure that the drilling works be in line with the established
procedures.

Article 229
Site Preparation and Drill Machine Set Up
1. Drill site shall be located in a quite safe distance from aerial cable, underground cable and pipe
installation.
2. Drill site shall be cleared from any personnel, restricted for authorized personnel only, and provided with
emergency exit.
3. Drill site shall be provided with place for washing, changing and storing clothes and personnel
belongings, except if the site is located nearby such facilities.
+. !f the drilling machine is to be moved or transported to other locations, the drill pipe and other
equipment shall be secured, and drill tower placed at secure position. The drill machine shall be
transported with the assistance of a spotter.
5. !t is prohibited to perform other works below or near a drill derrick, which is being set up or dismantled,
or when the drill tower is being raised and lowered.
6. Raising or lowering drill tower or drill derrick shall be conducted in a clear condition.
7. Preventive measure shall be taken to protect the drill derrick and tower from any damaged caused by
strong wind when the drill tower are being raised or dismantled.
8. O.E.N's specifications shall be strictly followed when raising or lowering the drill derrick or drill tower. !t is
prohibited to overstrain the drill derrick and tower.
9. Lighting lamps at drilling site and pipe rack shall be properly arranged to ensure a sufficient lighting,
which does not glare the drill operator's eyes. When necessary, warning lamps for aerial traffic shall be
installed on drill derrick top or drill tower and shall comply with aerial traffic rules. The lighting shall be
provided with lamps seat and protector.
10. Drilling machine shall be operated on flat surface and when working on a bench, the drilling machine
shall be in a safe distance and at least 3 meters from the bench's edge. During drilling operation, the drill
machine shall be perpendicular to the bench's edge.

Article 230
Establishment of Hazardous Area
1. !f the drilling encounters a layer or sediment which releases noxious or flammable pressurized liquid or
gas, the Kepala Teknik Tambang or personnel in charge of the drilling operation shall immediately stop
the drilling and establish the site as hazard area.
2. The Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish guidelines of preventive measures, which must be taken in
the hazard area as referred to in paragraph (1).
3. The guidelines referred to in paragraph (2) including prohibition to smoke and use naked flame,
prohibition to use combustion engine motor, scaffolding, electrical equipment, emergency plug of a
borehole, and direction of the quantity and type of breathing apparatus and personal protective
equipment shall be available at the drilling site.


Article 231
Exploration Drilling
1. Exploration drilling shall always be provided with constantly updated site plan with a scale of at least 1:
2500, which is completed with longitudinal line and the condition of 500 meters radius within the site or
up to the mine boundary if the distance of the drill site from the mine authorization boundary is less than
500 meters.
2. The plan referred to in paragraph (1) shall indicate:
a. All structures, factories and pipe lines;
b. Location of all boreholes, in sequential number, both drilled and to be drilled; and
c. All roads, rivers, and water sources.
3. The cross section of each borehole shall be drawn with a scale of 1: 1000 in depth and 1: 20 in width and
shall always be updated at least once a month or soon after the drilling work is completed.
+. The cross section referred to in paragraph (3) shall indicate:
a. Soil layers;
b. Nineral reserve;
c. Ground water limit;
d. Types of borehole casing; and
e. Water flow plugging system.
5. Drilling work shall be provided with Drill Log to record:
a. Drilling methods;
b. Rock layer condition;
c. Formation of rocks bored;
d. Drill depth and location of each sediment;
e. Daily drill progress;
f. Borehole and drill pipe size;
g. Water flow plugging;
h. Result of sampling and water layer cap.
6. !f the presence of atheists' water changes the site plan, cross section plan, drill log and certain mineral
deposit, the copy of these changes shall be immediately sent to the Chief Nine !nspector.
7. All abandoned boreholes shall be refilled with solid materials.

Article 232
General Precautions
1. Prior to commencing drill work, the drill site shall be inspected for safety.
2. Portable fire extinguisher of suitable size and type shall be available in sufficient number and in ready-for-
use and well-maintained condition.
3. The workers at or near the drill plant shall always wear safety helmet, shoes and other personal
protection equipment.
+. Prior to commencing drill work at the beginning of each shift, the workers shall inspect and ensure that
all equipment is safe for use. Unsafe conditions and corrective measures against them shall be recorded
in the Drill Log.
5. !t is prohibited to travel or transport the drill plant, except if all workers have been in a safe place.
6. Noving parts, which are liable to create any hazards or injuries, shall be guarded. Feed chain guard shall
be strong enough to resist the impact of falling broken chain.
7. Stair, stairway, handrails, and safety fence on the platform shall be maintained in good condition. !t is
prohibited to place, store or put equipment on the stair, stairways, and work floor.
8. Drill operator shall be prohibited to leave an operating drill plant.
9. Drill operator and other personnel shall be in a safe distance from a rotating drill pipe. !t is prohibited to
walk across rotating drill pipe.
10. Drill operator shall be prohibited to hold drill pipe or put his hands on the drill chuck when the drilling is
in progress.
11. !f the electric power is shut off, drill machines' control lever shall be returned to neutral position until the
electricity is resumed.
12. Boreholes, which are not being used, shall be closed or fenced.
13. !t is prohibited to perform mud flush drilling except when the plant is equipped with a warning device in
case of a loss of mud flash.

Article 233
Drill Plant Safety
1. Drill derrick or drill tower shall be inspected prior to its installation or set up. Tools and other small
equipment needed during the set up shall be tied securely to prevent them from falling. Heavy tools shall
not be lifted manually, and there shall be special equipment to raise and lower them from and to the
working platform.
2. The raising and lowering operations of the drill tower shall follow the instruction of the signalman. Under
no circumstances can the rotary head or lifting equipment be used to raise or lower the workers.
3. Drill tower operator shall wear safety harness whenever he is raising or installing drill pipe. The safety
harness shall be tied securely to the drill tower at a height of three meters above the working platform
and shall be prevented from catching into the rotating gearwheel.
+. !f additional buildings are used around the drill plant-working platform, the plant shall be provided with a
safety fence of 90 meters high and a 15 cm high frame on the floor. Pathway, stairway, and working
floor shall be provided with non-slip working platform.
5. Persons suffering from acrophobia shall not work on the drill plant. Workers who are working on a high
place at the drill plant shall wear safety harness and belt and be provided with ropes to tie the tools.
6. Drilling platform of the drill plant and that for draw works shall at least be provided with two opposite
and obstacle-free exists.
7. Safety line at each platform or the drill derrick shall be well maintained.
8. Electric motor, which energizes the drive engine, shall be provided with emergency stop system. Electric
motor and other electric equipment shall be grounded.
9. Drill derrick operator shall not be on the drill derrick and all workers shall be in a safe distance from the
working platform when handling a drill pipe, which is being choked. The workers shall be in a safe
distance when the drill pipe is being lowered into or pulled out from the borehole.
10. Rack or box for storing the drill bit and other tools shall be available.
11. Hoisting block, which is suspended on the drill derrick and the tower of portable drill, shall be provided
with safety devices to prevent the pulling cables from derailing.

Article 234
Bangka Drill
1. When the boreholes are being enlarged or deepened, the supporting pipe shall remain in vertical position.
2. Two or more persons shall be prohibited to be in the working platform during collaring and four or more
persons shall be prohibited to be on the working platform when the supporting pipes have been installed
rigidly.
3. The edge of the rotary working platform shall be provided with a 15 cm high frame.
+. Tools and equipment shall not be left on the rotary working platform.
5. On the auger drill, installation and dismantling of the drill plant, and collaring shall be performed
manually. Therefore, during these works, the drill plant shall be disconnected from the electric source or
drive motor.

Article 235
Warning and Other Signs
Authorized Personnel Only", No Naked Flame", "No Smoking" and other sign as well arrows indicating the
location of fire extinguisher and First Aids box shall be installed at visible locations.

Article 236
Hand Drill
Prior to transporting a pneumatic hand drill to other locations, the compressor shall be turned off and hoses
shall be detached.

Article 237
Floating Drill Plant
1. Working deck of a floating platform shall be at least 50 cm high above the water surface during high tide,
and shall be provided with safety fence, floor frame, and other safety devices. The floating platform shall
be waterproof and expected at least once in a week.
2. Each corner of the working deck shall be tied to a sufficiently heavy anchor. The anchor rope with a
length of five times the water depth shall be tensioned. The anchor location beneath the water shall be
sign-posted.
3. Every floating drill installation shall be provided with:
a. Life jackets with a quantity of 110 of the total number of workers on the deck, and shall be placed
at visible and easily accessible location;
b. Sufficient quantity of not less than 5 meter hooked-stick with a rope of not less than 25 meters in
length;
c. At least three life buoys with at least 25 meters long ropes.
+. During a shift, a lifeboat with capacity of at least 150 of the total number of workers in the shift shall
be available.
5. !f a huge wave is predicted to occur, the drill plant shall be moved at least +0 meters from the original
position and anchored. All workers shall leave the drill plant.
6. A two-way radio communication system shall be available between the floating drill plant and the onshore
station.

Article 23S
Drill Ship
1. Every drill ship and auxiliary ship, which is used for drill work, shall subject to the prevailing sailing
regulation.
2. Drill derrick or drill rod at the drill ship shall be provided with:
a. Company flag and suitable warning sign which is clearly visible at the day time;
b. Red lamp at the top of the ship, which is clearly visible at a distance of 2 nautical miles.
c. One or more ordinary lamps installed at a height between 6 meters and 30 meters above sea level,
shall be clearly seen at a distance of at least 5 nautical miles during dark hours.
3. The lamps referred to in paragraph (2) letter c shall be designed to send Norse Signal (..._) continuously
for fifteen seconds.
+. Every drill ship shall be provided with reserved power supply (generator).
5. Every drill ship shall be provided with sufficient number of occupational safety equipment for fire
extinguishing, marine rescue and drill operation.




CHAPTER VI
SURFACE MINE

Section One
Safe Working Methods

Article 239
General
1. Nining, areas, either being-mined or mined area, which are liable to create any hazards shall be
surrounded by at least 80 cm high safety fences or provided with warning signs.
2. Entrance to any workplaces in a mining area shall be maintained.
3. Entrance as referred to in paragraph (2) with a slope steeper than +0 degrees shall be equipped with
permanent ladder or stairways. !f the slope of the ladder is more than 75 degrees, safety back rails shall
be installed.
+. The permanent ladder referred to in paragraph (3) shall be firmly and securely installed.
5. Permanent ladder of more than 10 meters high shall be equipped with a rest landing of every 10 meters
interval, and the end of the ladder shall protrude 90 cm on each landing.
6. The use of cable way or other railway train for personnel transportation shall obtain permit from the Chief
Nine !nspector.
7. Opening of a shaft, container, furnace or hopper shall be provided with safety fence.

Article 240
Working Procedures
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that the slop stability of excavation and dumping areas, as well as
other materials has been calculated in the mine planning.
2. Dumping of overburden shall only be performed at a minimum distance of 7.5 meters from the top
bench's edge of excavation area.
3. Undercutting shall not be done on the workface, bench of gallery, unless otherwise approved by the Chief
Nine !nspector.
+. Workface shall be clear of hanging rocks and during rock blasting, the area shall also be clear of
personnel.
5. When a task on a workface with a height of more than 2.5 meters from the floor shall be carried out
manually, the workers shall wear safety belt or harness.
6. Workface or surface mine on the top of an underground mine activity shall only be made after an
approval has been obtained from the Chief Nine !nspector.
7. Any personnel shall not work or be present on top of an active stone pile, unless:
a. When instructed by the mine inspector
b. The pouring of the stones to and from the pile has been stopped `
c. An action has been taken to make sure that hopper beneath the pile has been closed;
d. The worker wears safety belt tied with a suitable length of rope, which is securely and strongly tied
up at a permanent point overhead.

Article 241
The Height of Workplace and the width of Bench
1. Slope, height, and width of a bench shall be made properly and safely to protect the workers against any
falling materials.
2. Height of bench for working on a seam which contains sand, mud, gravel, and other loose materials shall
not be:
a. Nore than 2.5 meters if the work is performed manually;
b. Nore than 6 meters if the work is performed mechanically;
c. Nore than 20 meters if the work is done by using clamshell, dragline, bucket wheel excavator or
other similar equipment, unless an approval has been obtained from the chief Nine !nspector;
3. The bench height for a work performed on compact materials shall not more than 6 meters if it is
performed manually.
+. !f the excavation is performed by the use of mechanical equipment equipped with a sturdy operator's
compartment, the maximum height of the bench for any compact materials shall be 15 meters, unless an
approval has been obtained from the Chief Nine !nspector.
5. Study of slope stability shall be perform if:
a. The total bench height of a bench mining system is more than 15 meters; and
b. The height of each bench is more than 15 meters.

Article 242
1. Activities such as construction of shaft, tunnel or other similar works whose wall opening is more tan 1.2
meters high shall be supported or built in safe slope.
2. The construction of temporaryfpermanent embankment or dam must be sufficiently strong and in
compliance with the prevailing regulations.

Article 243
Drainage and Dam
1. All surface mines shall have well-planned drainage system with sufficient capacity.
2. !n order to reduce water pouring into an open cut area, systematic embankment and drainage be
constructed.

Section Two
Hydraulic Mine

Article 244
General
Hydraulic mine plan, including water circulation, water drainage, and dam, tailing pool, etc. shall be well
specified.

Article 245
Dam
1. Dam shall be constructed in accordance with a competent engineer's plan.
2. The base width of a dam constructed from shad shall be at least six times of the dam height, and the
wall slope shall not be less than 60 degrees toward horizontal side or not exceeding the slope of the filler
materials.
3. Logs used for dam construction shall be sufficiently strong and rigidly installed.
+. The dam shall be provided with a piping system or canal capable of flowing the water and limiting the
water surface at a minimum of 60 cm below the Dam surface.

Article 246
Monitor Operation
1. Nanual monitor shall be provided with counterweight. During operation, an operator must constantly
control the monitor. Distance of the monitor from the bench shall be at least equal to the bench height.
2. There shall not be any logs, boulders, or other obstacles within a 3 meter-radius from the monitor.
3. Unauthorized personnel shall not be permitted to be in front of an operating monitor.
+. Nine workers trained to operate the monitor shall be supervised by an experienced mine worker
5. The monitor's water pressure must be strong enough to spray up to the upper bench wall.
6. The height of mine bench shall not exceed 6 meters, unless otherwise determine by the chief mine
inspector.

Article 247
Pump and Pipe
1. Water pump installed on water surface shall be equipped with equipment that can elevate the pump
when required.
2. The end of the pump's suction pipe should be supported on a tripod and provided with a floating device
and fence.
3. The pump housing shall be equipped with audio signal controlled by a person in charge.
+. The pump housing shall be provided with roof and its interior shall be dry and clean.
5. The pump shall be provided with indicator gauge.
6. Prior to operating a jet jump, the person in-charge shall inform the monitor operator.
7. The surrounding area of the suction pipe end of the jet jump shall be equipped with safety fences and
warning sign.
8. The conveying pipes shall be installed and shall not be used as a pathway.

Article 24S
Electricity and Machinery
1. Any electrical motor and lamps at pump housing, jig plant and classifier shall be water - proof.
2. Electrical plant shall be equipped with grounding.
3. Aerial cable poles andfor standard lamps shall be placed away from monitor jet and a cliff.
+. Power line plant shall not pass over steel fmetal pipes.
5. Spotlight shall be placed on a dry location behind the monitor and directed toward the mine front.
6. Portable spotlight shall be quipped with leakage breaker.

Section Three
Earthmoving Equipment

Article 249
General
1. Type and construction of earthmoving equipment used in a mine operation shall suit the natures of work,
field condition, and the characteristics of soil and stone to be handled.
2. Nodification of earthmoving equipment which affects its safety and stability shall be approved by the
chief mine inspector.

Article 250
Requirements for Operators
1. An operator of earthmoving equipment used for mining operation shall fulfill the following requirements:
a. Hefshe is above 21 years old;
b. Hefshe is declared mentally and physically healthy by a physician; and
c. Hefshe has an operating permit issued by Kepala Teknik Tambang or by other competent authority
on behalf of Kepala Teknik Tambang.
2. The permit referred to in paragraph (1); point (c) shall only be issued after someone has passed a test
for operating earthmoving equipment conducted by a relevant mining company.
3. The permit shall only be valid within the mining area of the company, which issued the permit.

Article 251
Prohibition to Carry Passengers
1. The operator shall prohibit unauthorized person to ride operating earthmoving equipment except for
inspection, supervision, maintenance, and repair purpose or upon the instruction from the trainer in-
charge.
2. !t is prohibited to mount and dismount operating earthmoving equipment.

Article 252
Parking of Earthmoving Equipment
1. Earthmoving equipment shall not be left unless the park brake is activated, the blade and bucket lowered
to the ground, and the engine turned off.
2. Earthmoving equipment parked on a slope shall be choked or parked toward the bream, and the bucket
and blade are lowered to the ground.
3. !f electrically powered earthmoving equipment is to be left unattended, the main switch shall be turned
off and any control levers or buttons must be in neutral position, and parking brake must be applied.
+. !f a dozer is parked in an area, which can cause traffic hazards, parking lights or other warning signs
shall be turned on.

Article 253
Inspection and Maintenance
1. Engine and mechanical parts of earthmoving equipment shall be checked prior to operation and
periodically.
2. Technical Supervisor shall appoint a technician and arrange periodical inspection referred to in paragraph
1.
3. The result of inspection and maintenance referred to in paragraph 1 shall be recorded in an available
book, and signed by the appointed technician.
+. !t is prohibited to walk across or under the boom or a part of earthmoving equipment, which is being
raised, unless safety measures have been taken against sudden lowering of the boom and the parts,
which are being raised.
5. Noving earthmoving equipment shall not be lubricated unless otherwise provided with automatic greasing
system.
6. !t is prohibited to perform maintenance on moving earthmoving equipment, unless the movement is
needed for repair and maintenance purpose, and the repair person or maintenance personnel shall be in
a safe position and provide with necessary safety equipment.

Article 254
Equipment
1. The ground condition where earthmoving equipment operates shall be solid, secure and stable and, to
prevent accidental movement during loading, the loader shall be chocked with safety block.
2. Working radius of an earthmoving shall be free from any obstacles and other personnel.
3. Prior to operating earthmoving equipment, the operator shall sound warning signal.
+. Earthmoving equipment shall be operated in accordance with the manufacturer's specification on load,
speed, rpm, and the slope of work area.
5. !t is prohibited to swing dipper and bucket over the haul vehicles cabin before the operator leaves the
cabin for a safe place, unless the vehicles is specially designed to protect the operator against any falling
objects.
6. !t is prohibited to use an earthmoving equipment to lift or load hazardous materials.
7. !f the earthmoving equipment is traveled to other locations, the dipper and bucket shall be lifted just
above the ground, at a height, which does not disturb the operator's visibility; and for a dragline, the
bucket shall be maintained near the boom.

Article 255
Bulldozer
1. !f a bulldozer operates on a steep slope, preventive measures shall be taken by tying the bulldozer in
order not to roll or coast down in the slope.
2. !f a bulldozer is performing tree-cleaning work and there is a falling tree hazard, no other personnel shall
be allowed to enter the hazard area.
3. A bulldozer which is required to do the work referred to in paragraph (2) shall be equipped with a sturdy
canopy.

Article 256
Precautions
1. !t is prohibited to ride on the bucket of earthmoving equipment.
2. !t is prohibited to work or pass under the bucket of an operating loader.
3. During the nighttime or when the visibility is poor, the earthmoving equipment shall be provided with
sufficient illumination lights.

Section Four
Emergency Evacuation
Article 257
1. !f the person in charge of any section of a mining operation is aware of a potential hazard, he shall:
a. !nspect or assign someone to inspect the potential hazardous area and take safety measures;
b. !mmediately instruct the worker(s) in the potential hazardous area to evacuate if the condition
cannot be secured.
c. After instructing the evacuation referred to in paragraph (2), inform his immediate
supervisorfsuperintendent of the hazard and the evacuation; and
d. Prevent anyone from entering the hazardous area before the hazard status is lifted.
2. Nine workers who are aware of or predict any potential hazard shall:
a. !nstruct everyone to evacuate from the hazardous area;
b. !mmediately inform the person in charge of the hazardous area;
The hazardous condition and corrective action taken to overcome the hazard shall be recorder in the
mine book.








CHAPTER VII
DREDGE

Section one
Person in Charge

Article 25S
Responsibilities
1. Every dredge shall be led by a dredge master who is in charge of leading, managing, and supervising all
dredge work, including other work related to the dredge operation.
2. The dredge master shall be responsible for the safety and health of all personnel aboard and in other
places under his supervision.
3. The dredge master shall be assisted by number of shift leader, who are in charge of the dredge operation
during their shifts.
+. Any dredge shall be prohibited to operate in the absence of the dredge master or shift leaders.
5. To be eligible for dredge master or shift leader positions, the candidates shall comply with the
requirement of Kepala Teknik Tambang, and their names be registered in the mine book.

Article 259
Buku Peraturan Kerja Kapal Keruk
{Dredge Operating Procedures)
1. Every dredge shall be provided with Buku Peraturan Kerja Kapal Keruk and Buku Jurnal Teknik (Technical
Journal), which have to be authorized by Kepala Teknik Tambang and comply with the form required by
the chief mine inspector.
2. The contents of the Buku Peraturan Kerja Kapal Keruk shall be well understood by all dredge personnel.
3. Buku Peraturan Kerja Kapal Keruk shall contain:
a. Copy of mine Dredge Regulation:
b. All instructions, prohibition, and guidelines already recorded in the mine book.
c. Result of inspection and measurement of fuel compartment and tank from each shift.
d. Result of pontoon height measurement from the four corners of the dredge at each shift.
e. Result of weekly inspection of ballast pump and its piping.
f. Result of inspection conducted by Kepala Teknik Tambang or his deputy or an expert; and.
g. Warning and operating signals.
+. The copy of Buku Peraturan Kerja Kapal Keruk shall be available in the land mine office, and all records in
the original book shall be immediately in the copy edition.

Article 260
Mine Dredge workers
1. All mine dredge workers shall be able to swim.
2. A temporary mine dredge worker and a person authorized by the Kepala Teknik Tambang or the Dredge
master, who is not able to swim, shall wear life jacket during his work or presence on dredge.

Article 261
Dredge master's Duties
1. The Dredge master shall immediately report to Kepala Teknik Tambang in the following events:
a. Fire which can hinder the dredge operation;
b. Any damage which threatens the safety of dredge and its personnel;
c. Dredge inclines to more than 2
0;

d. Severe weather which can jeopardize the dredge's safety; and
e. Personnel fall overboard the dredge
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall heed the dredge master's report as referred to in paragraph (1), and
immediately give instructions and directives for the safety of the dredge and its personnel.
3. The instructions and directives referred to in paragraph (2) shall put the safety of the mine dredge
workers into priority.

Article 262
Dredge Requirements
1. Every dredge shall be stable and operation-worthy.
2. Every dredge shall be provided with a sound-tight control room, electric generation room, and hygienic
dining room.
3. Every dredge shall be provided with a properly maintained ballast pump or lens.
+. The dredge's deck shall be constructed in such a way that it prevents water from stagnating.

Article 263
Dredge's Operational Permit
1. The Chief Nine !nspector, based on his inspection result, will issue dredge operational permit, which is
applicable for ten years old and can be extended.
2. The granting of extension referred to in paragraph (1) shall depend on inspection results of the Chief
Nine !nspector or an expert appointed by him.
3. Any modification, which will influence the dredge safety, shall be prohibited, unless authorized by the
Chief Nine !nspector.

Section Two
Dredge Placement

Article 264
Mooring
1. Dredge's spring line, headline, and stern line on the land and on the sea shall be properly anchored.
2. Any coupling of a clamp connection shall be secured with a nut or safety pin.

Article 265
Spring Line Installation and Inspection
1. Every spring line shall be free from any obstacles and stretched straight from the dredge to the anchor.
2. !f the obstacle cannot be eliminated from spring line path, the line shall be stretched safely.
3. !t is prohibited to perform a job in the distance of at least 20 meters from the stretching spring line of an
operate dredge.
+. Before pulling the spring line, the operator shall ensure that no personnel are in a rope windings
remaining on the drum.
5. When the spring line is extended to its maximum length, there shall be at least two rope windings
remaining on the drum.
6. A competent person appointed by Kepala Teknik Tambang shall make the line eye".
7. Any anchor placement shall be posted with conspicuous signs.
8. Spring line path in the sea shall be posted with conspicuous signs.



Article 266
Spring Line Floaters
1. !t is prohibited to be on the spring line floaters when the line's drive motor is in operation.
2. Two buddies on the rescue boat shall attend any personnel working on or repairing a spring line floaters.
3. All personnel referred to in paragraph (2) shall wear life jacket.
+. The rescue boat shall be provided with aids equipment.
5. Safety boat shall not be necessary if the floaters or the working boat as referred to in paragraph (2) have
sufficient stability and space.

Article 267
Water-or-Road Crossing Spring Line
1. !f the spring line crosses land roads or water, necessary precautions shall be taken and warning sign shall
be installed.
2. The supports for spring line that crosses land roads shall be sufficiently strong and safe.
3. !f the spring line crosses water, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall appoint personnel to ensure the safety
thereof.
+. The water travelers referred to in paragraph (3) shall only be allowed after the spring line submerged in
the water.
5. The spring line referred to in paragraph (+) shall be weighted for quicker and deeper sinking.
6. !f the access to the dredge crosses spring line the Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish safety
regulations thereof.

Section Three
Dredge's Pontoon

Article 26S
Compartment's Inspection Opening
1. Every compartment shall be provided with inspection opening and watertight door. The opening shall be
at least 50 cm high and 60 cm in diameter or width, and shall always be maintained properly.
2. !f the dredge construction does not allow closing of the inspection, the Chief Nine !nspector, after
consulting the Kepala Teknik Tambang, shall determine other decision on regulate the inspection
opening.

Article 269
Compartment
1. Every compartment, except for reserve fuel and water compartment shall be waterproof, dry and clean.
2. !t is prohibited to make an opening on the compartment's separating walls, unless permitted by the
Kepala Teknik Tambang.
3. The permit to make an opening on the compartment's separating walls shall be recorded in the Nining
Book.
+. Safety procedures on the works referred to in paragraph (2) shall be decided by Kepala Teknik Tambang
and recorded in Buku Peraturan Kerja Kapal Keruk.
5. Upon work completion, all openings shall be closed immediately
6. The dredge's right and left sides pontoons and those near the bucket ladder shall be protected with
safety tank.
7. !t is prohibited to store any goods within the compartment for storage purpose or for balancing the
dredge, unless specially permitted by the Chief Nine !nspector.
Article 270
Compartment's Ventilation
1. Dredge's compartment shall be well ventilated.
2. Every dredge shall be provided with an exhausting fan.
3. Air pressure in the last compartment of the ventilation system shall be at least 20 cm water column
higher than the air pressure outside the compartment.
+. The height of ventilation pipe on the dredge's deck edge side shall be at least +0 cm on the other parts.
5. The height of ventilation pipe on the deck of on land dredge shall be at least 60 cm and at least +0 cm on
the other parts.
6. The ventilation pipe shall be provided with watertight cap that is hung on the pipe.
7. The ventilation pipe referred to in paragraphs (+) and (5) shall be free from any piles of material and
easily visible and accessible.
8. The end of ventilation and pipe, which leads into the compressor, shall be provided with diffuser.

Section Four
Inspection
Article 271
Routine Inspection
1. At the beginning of each shift all compartment~ shall be inspected, and the contents of cooling water
tank, fuel tank, and ballast tank must be measured.
2. At least once in a week, ballast pump or lens installation with its pipe and tap shall be inspected and
tested.
3. The report of inspection result shall be signet by the inspection personnel.
+. Ballast purple's installation, which does not function properly, shall be maintained immediately, at the
latest of 2 X 2+ hours.

Article 272
Compartment Inspection Procedures
1. Compartment inspection shall be performed by two personnel, one of them is a buddy, watching outside
the compartment, at the edge of the inspection hole.
2. The personnel who enter the compartment shall be provided with radio. Communication tools or wears
safety harness connected to a sufficiently long and strong rope for giving sign in case of emergency.
3. Prior to entering the compartment, his compartment shall be continually blown with fresh air for at least
30 minutes.
+. Every portable lamp used for compartment inspection shall be gas-tight and not exceed 2+ volts.

Section Five
Dredge Safety
Article 273
Pontoon Sections on Water Surface
1. The height of pontoon sections on water surface shall not be less than 50 cm, and in case of emergency
shall not be less than 25 cm.
2. To enable easy reading of pontoon's height on the water surface, as referred to in paragraph (1), the
four dredge corners shall be provided with measuring gauge,
3. The provision of the pontoon section height of the water surface, as referred to in paragraph (1) can be
exempted upon approval of the Chief Nine !nspector,
+. At the end of every shift, the height of pontoon sections on the water surface: !ncluding the position of
bucket wheel, shall be recorded.

Article 274
Dredge's Inclination
1. Every dredge shall be provided with a legible inclinometer, which is installed horizontally in the control
room.
2. The following action shall be taken the dredge inclination exceeds two degrees:
a. All excavation and pump works shall be halted.
b. An effort shall be made to regain the dredge's stability
c. Report shall be given to the Kepala Teknik Tambang
d. All personnel not directly related to the effort of regaining the dredge's stability shall be prepared to
leave the dredge.
3. Should the dredge's inclination exceed 5 degrees, the dredge master shall instruct all personnel on board
to leave the dredge, except personnel who area directly related to the effort regaining the dredge
stability.
+. Should the dredge's inclination exceed 7 degree, all personnel shall leave the dredge.
5. Based on the study of the dredge's stability, Kepala Teknik Tambang can ask for exemption referred to in
paragraph (3) and (+) to the chief mine inspector.
6. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish evacuation procedures in case of emergency.

Section Six
Safety Equipment

Article 275
The pontoon surroundings shall be provided with rope or chains with tires of not more than +0 cm height
above the water level.

Article 276
1. Every dredge shall be provided with:
a. Life jackets that comply with the !ndonesia National Standard (SN!, with the quantity of 100 of the
maximum number of the dredge's crew. The life jackets shall be placed on visible and easily
accessible locations.
b. At least six eyeless hooks, with 5 meter long stick each.
c. At least six small safety boats with 25 meter long ropes each.
d. At least six buoys with at least 25 meter long ropes each.
2. The equipment referred to in paragraph (1) shall always be available on the dredge and kept in good
condition.

Article 277
Safety Chain on Tailing Pond
1. The tailor's pond on each dredge shall be provided with at least three horizontally or longitudinally
installed chains.
2. Two chains with rings at the ends shall be hung 25 cm above the lower end of the tailing pond the rings
shall be 10 cm above the water.

Article 27S
Dredge that uses conveyor belt to dispose waste shall be provided with circuit breaker ! connected to easily
accessible ropes along the conveyor belt.
Article 279
Fire Prevention
1. Every dredge shall be provided with sufficient quantity and capacity of fire extinguisher, which can handle
all kinds of fires.
2. The fire extinguisher shall be placed at every fire-prone area, at easily accessible location, area clearly
signed. The fire extinguisher shall be well maintained in ready for use condition.
3. !n addition to the fire extinguishers referred to in paragraph (1), electric generation room shall be
provided with bigger' capacity foam fire extinguishers which can be placed on a trolley or other means for
easy usage.
+. All supervisors and personnel in the electric generation room and transformer shall be trained to safely
and effectively use the fire extinguishers.
5. !t is prohibited to put materials in front of or nearby the fire extinguisher, which obstruct access to the
fire extinguisher.
6. Liquid fuel pipes in the engine room shall be made of copper or iron.
7. !t is prohibited to put materials, particularly flammable materials, in or nearby an electric panel or
transformer.

Article 2S0
1. Dredge operation shall be attended .by an auxiliary boat or motor boat for personnel transportation and-
emergency condition:
2. All auxiliary boats or motorboats operation shall comply with this regulation, as long r. as not in coil
prevention of the sea transportation regulation.
3. Every auxiliary boat or motorboat shall be provided with life jackets, at least 110 of the maximum
number of personnel aboard. The motorboats shall be provided. ! with sufficient quantity of fire
extinguishers.
+. The auxiliary motorboat shall be provided with radio communication equipment.
5. The auxiliary motorboat, which assists only one offshore dredge, shall always be located nearby the
dredge.
6. Working bucket used in the dredge operation shall be regarded as a part of the dredge.

Article 2S1
Spill Anchor
Any off the dredge shall be provided with a spill anchor installed at the middle edge of the dredge's rear and.
And shall always be in ready for use condition.

Section Seven
Machines and Electricity

Article 2S2
Machines
1. When the electric generating engine is going to be started or restarted, all warning signs on the dredge
shall be sounded.
2. Prior to starting or restarting machines and equipment or part moving equipment, the shift leader or the
machine attendant shall a inspect to ensure that the action will not endanger other personnel.
3. Any hazardous moving part of machine or transmission equipment on the dredge shall be well guarded.
+. !t is prohibited to store flammable substances or liquids in the electric generating engine room.
5. Rotating screen, bucket drive chain, rope drum drive, stair and the drive of spring line shall be provided
with emergency stop switch and local switch by maintenance personnel.
6. The emergency and local swathes referred to in paragraph (5) shall be located at easily visible and
accessible location, and provided with conspicuous sign.

Article 2S3
Electricity
1. Every off shore dredge shall be provided with reserve electric generator whose capacity shall at least be
able to provide electricity for illumination lamps, ballets pump, and radio communication tools. The
reserve electric generator shall always be maintained in ready for use condition.
2. All panels, switches and electric lamps which are exposed to water shall be water tight
3. Electric cable on the dredge shall be installed a tray.
+. Electric cables, which are exposed on the work floor, be guarded.
5. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish special regulation on any electric welding on the dredge. The
regulation shall cover.
a. Safe location of weld works
b. The weld work use special alternating current conductor cable, and the transformer shall be
separated from the welding machine.
c. Provisions on filler metal storage and handle and cable maintenance and
d. Cable connection of electric welding shall be properly isolated for water tightness.
6. !t is prohibited to use alternating current welding machine on the dredge.
7. Trail cable connections of electric conductor from the land electric generator to the dredge shall be water
tight and supported on floaters.
8. Every dredge operating at the sea shall be provided with fog light (halogen lamp), at least on the dredge
bow and stern.

Section Eight
Safety Precautions

Article 2S4
Personnel Overboard
1. The following actions be taken immediately when a personnel is over boat
a. Hazard alarm sounded
b. Excavation and pump works stopped, and
c. Rescue efforts taken
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang can order decommissioning of the excavation and pump work if the victim has
been recovered or maximum rescue efforts have been taken.

Article 2S5
Diving Team
1. Every dredge or a number of closely located dredges shall employ trained diving team capable of using
Sub aqua breathing apparatus, unless otherwise determined by the chief mine inspector.
2. The diving team referred to in paragraph (1) shall be under supervisor of Kepala Teknik Tambang.
3. Every diving team crew shall be trained in possession of Sub Aqua Breathing Apparatus certificate issued
by a training school or other institutions acknowledged by the chief mine inspector
+. Every diving team crew shall.
a. Have his residential and office addresses known for emergency contact
b. Attend regular skills upgrading and
c. Undergo regular medical inspection.
5. The diving team shift shall be such arranged that sufficient number of divers is available when needed.
6. Sub Aqua Breathing Apparatus and oxygen cylinders shall be available in sufficient quantity, properly
maintained and stored in places determined by the Kepala Teknik Tambang.

Article 2S6
Hazard Signals
1. Every dredge shall posses' audio or visual hazard signals.
2. The audio and visual signal referred to in paragraph (1) shall be designated by the Kepala Teknik
Tambang and recorded in the Buku Kerja Kapal Keruk.
3. All dredge persons related to the dredge operation shall understand the meaning of hazard signals
referred to in paragraph (1)
+. Should a hazard occur, only the dredge master or the shift leader, or the appointed person is allowed to
sound or give the hazard signals.

Article 2S7
Working Signals
1. Every dredge shall be provided with audio working signals.
2. The working signal codes, which are used on the dredge, shall be designated by the Kepala Teknik
Tambang and understood by all personnel aboard.
3. The signal codes shall be placed at easily visible location at every workplace on the dredge.

Section Nine
Towing A Mine Dredge

Article 2SS
1. A dredge can be towed only after obtaining written permit from Kepala Teknik Tambang. The permit shall
contain the towing procedures.
2. The copy of towing permit referred to in paragraph (1) shall be sent to the chief mine inspector.

Article 2S9
Safety Precautions
1. Prior to towing a dredge in an open sea, the following safety precautions shall be taken.
a. Each pontoon's compartment shall be in safe condition
b. Each inspection opening shall be tightly closed and water proof
c. Pump and its pipes are in ready for use condition
d. ventilation pipe shall be closed and water proof and
e. All loose equipment shall be secured
2. Any dredge which is being towed shall be provided with:
a. Necessary equipment for mooring
b. Reserve water pump with independent driving engine
c. Sufficient water and fuel
d. Welding machine and
e. Food and water of sufficient for all personnel aboard during the towing, plus 100 reserve

Article 290
1. During the towing, the number of personnel aboard the dredge shall be limited only to match the works
required during the towing operation, and the personnel names shall be registered in the Buku Peraturan
Kerja Kapal Keruk.
2. When a barge or raft is towed together with the dredge no one shall be allowed to come aboard the
Barge and the raft, and both shall be such tied to the dredge that they can be detached easily in case of
emergency.

Article 291
Communication between the dredge master and the tugboat captain shall use two-way radio communication.


































CHAPTER VIII
UNDERGROUND ORE MINE

Section One
Mine Administration

Article 295
Mine Section
Underground mines which are located adjacent to one another or share the same ventilation unit shall be
deemed one underground mine, and shall be under supervision of one Kepala Teknik Tambang, unless
otherwise determined by the chief mine inspector.

Article 296
Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah
{Chief of Underground Mine and Supervisors)
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall appoint a Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah, whose name is registered in the
Nine Book.
2. !n performing his inspection in the mine area, Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall be assisted by
operational supervisor and technical supervisor.
3. !f there is more than one underground mining or if the mine covers a vast area, regional supervisor can
be appointed based on areas of responsibility.
+. The boundary of area referred to in paragraph (3) and article 296 shall be void if the number of mine
workers working in underground mine, at any time is less than 20 persons for mechanical mining, and
less 100 persons for manual mining.
5. !n appointing supervisors referred to in article 296 paragraphs (2) and (3), Kepala Teknik Tambang shall
provide job description in writing based on area of responsibility and time.
6. The provision referred to in article 12 shall also be applicable in appointing underground mine operational
and technical supervisor.

Article 29S
Duties of Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah and Supervisors
1. The duties of Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah are:
a. Arranging all mine operation activities in accordance with the provisions here in and the guidelines of
Kepala Teknik Tambang.
b. Ensuring availability of auxiliary material for underground mine provisions here in and the guidelines
of Kepala Teknik Tambang
c. Performing at least quarterly inspection on all ventilation administrations and all underground mine
section requiring ventilation.
2. !nspection of equipment, tools, machinery, electricity and underground mine work shall be in accordance
with the supervisor's duties.
3. Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah or his representative can ask written order from the company or Kepala
Teknik Tambang for any works which can influence his responsibilities, as per the regulation here in.
+. !n case of emergency, Kepala Teknik Tambang can directly give instruction to the underground mine
workers, not via Kepala Teknik Tambang.
5. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure careful recording of the number of persons at each underground
mine shift

Article 299
1. Operational and technical supervisors shall report to Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah.
2. The supervisors referred to in articles 12 and 13 shall report to Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah.
Article 300
1. Operational supervisor of each shift shall:
a. !nspect every workplace and roadway to be used during the shift, and every workplace following a
blasting and
b. !nspect way outs and ladders to be used by the workers during the workday
2. !n performing the inspection referred to in paragraph (1), the operational supervisor shall take corrective
action against any deviation.
3. !n a frequency of not more than 7 days, operational supervisor shall take corrective action against any
deviation.
+. Operational supervisor shall perform:
a. Comprehensive inspection on ventilation channel in a frequency of not more than 30 days.
b. !nspection along the road which is not generally used, but usable for alternative emergency exit, in a
frequency of not more than three months and
c. !nspection against potential water hazard andfor accumulated sludge, and perform safety action.
5. Technical supervisor shall inspect:
a. Underground hoist facilities and infrastructure with a frequency of not more than 2+ hours for
personnel transportation hoist and frequency of 7 days for material transportation hoist.
b. Personnel and material transportation facilities at each level.
c. Nine dewatering pump and
d. Supporting condition.

Article 301
Duties and Obligations of Underground Mine Workers
1. !n addition to the provisions referred to in articles 32 and 33, every underground mine workers shall.
a. Cooperate and obey the guidance given by the supervisor or the person in charge
b. Not in any way render other persons unable to work
c. Not move or damage safety fence cover barrier warning signs or other safety facilities.
d. Be prohibited to walk to and from the workplace, except via a determined route.
e. Be prohibited to force their way thought a barrier or danger tape unless otherwise permitted by the
supervisor.
f. Be prohibited to sleep in an underground mine and.
g. Be prohibited to use force to open a locked door and enter a machinery room or control room, unless
permitted by the supervisor.
2. During the mine work operation.
a. The mineworkers shall inspect:
1. Road surface
2. Roads under renovation and repair and
3. Supports, which are being installed and removed particularly when blasting, are carried out in the
surrounding area.
b. Underground mine workers shall ensure that at the end of the Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah and
c. Underground mine workers shall take necessary measure to overcome mine ventilation problem.
3. !t is prohibited to leave lamps or easily flammable materials unattended.
+. !t is prohibited to handle or operate electric motor of more than 7.5-kilo watt capacity unless:
a. Performed by the appointed operator
b. Performed by a mine worker based on written order and
c. !n case of emergency (to shut off the motor)
5. !t is prohibited to release toxic or flammable gas in an underground mine
6. !t is prohibited to climb on top of the cage of personnel transportation hoist, unless permitted by the
supervisor.
7. When riding the cage it is prohibited to:
a. Try to open the cage door and
b. Try to get out of the cage before it stops completely.
Section Two
Exit

Article 302
General
Underground work shall be provided with two separate exits, except at the construction of a shaft edit
exploration tunnel or non-production tunnel which is excavated from a shaft or adit where not more than 30
(thirty) workers are working.

Article 303
Adit
1. The shafts or adits referred to in article 302 shall located more than 30 meters to one another to ensure
that when one of them has a problem, it will not influence the use of the other shafts or adits.
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish rescue procedures in case of malfunction, which causes one of the
adits out of operation.
3. Should a malfunction referred to in paragraph (2) accrue, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall:
a. Organize personnel rescue from an adit
b. Order safety action and
c. Report to the chief mine inspector
+. !n the event of a malfunction referred to in paragraph (2), underground work shall be stopped and
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall restrict the number of personnel working underground only to:
a. Nine workers who area taking safety measure for the malfunction adit and
b. Nine workers who are giving first aids for the hazard incident and damaged equipment.
5. Repair of the malfunction adit as referred to in paragraph (2) shall only be performed after obtaining
prior approval from the mine inspector.

Article 304
Auxiliary Tools Equipment
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall provide additional equipment if the regular equipment of the adit is out
order
2. The additional equipment referred to in paragraph (1) shall be:
a. Naintained, inspected and tested by a competent to in paragraph to ensure that it is in ready for use
condition and
b. !nspected and tested by a competent person.
3. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall range sufficient and effective training on the use of the equipment and to
ensure that the guidance is understood and obeyed and the copy is displayed in the mine office.

Article 305
Connection Between Exits
!n addition to the provisions referred to in article 302, every rider stop in a shaft or adit shall be provided
with access or ladder leading to the rider stop at other shafts or adits.

Article 306
Access and Ladder Construction and Maintenance
Kepala Teknik Tambang Bawah Tanah shall ensure that any man way to the workplaces shall be:
a. Suitably constructed and well maintained
b. Safe and easily for walking in and not less than 1.7 meter high and
c. Free from any obstacles
d. Every ladder and stairway shall be constructed and installed rigidly, and maintained properly

Article 307
Man way Out of the Workplace
1. !n addition to the provisions referred to in article 302 every workplace shall be provided with two
separate man way outs one leading to the shaft and one leading to the surface.
2. Both man way-outs shall be clearly indicated.
3. Nan way-out of the workplace to the mine exists shall be provided with a clear sketch.
+. The provision referred to in paragraph (1) shall not be applicable when:
a. The workplace is intended for a capacity of 9 (nine) workers, and with possible temporary addition of
three personnel, namely inspector, supervisor, or tester or sampler.
b. Approved by the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 30S
Fence or Barrier Requirements
1. Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall install sufficient barriers of fences at hazardous areas.
2. The personnel working at hazardous areas as referred to in paragraph (1) shall ensure that the barriers
and fences are in good condition.
3. !t is prohibited to alter or move barriers or fences at hazardous areas without the permit from Kepala
Teknik Tambang.

Article 309
Downcast Air Shaft
1) Kepala Teknik Tambang Shall ensures that downcast airshaft leading to a workplace shall be maintained
properly and constructed from flame- proof materials.
2) The followings shall be prohibited at the downcast airshaft.
a. Bringing in incendiary or flammable materials, and
b. Performing an activity, which can spark fire.

Section Three
Shaft and Hoist

Article 310
Shaft and Its Utilization
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that each shaft, raise, winze, and inclined shaft, including his or her
accessories, is safe and secure.
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that the operation of shaft, raise, winze and inclined shaft, including
their accessories, are safe.
3. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall:
a. Determine a number of competent personnel to perform inspection, testing, and maintenance of the
shaft, raise, winze, and inclined drift and their accessories.
b. Provide detailed, written information on the aspects to be inspected, tested, and maintained, as
referred to in letter (a), and
c. Record the inspection and test result.
+. !n Performing the works referred to in paragraph (3), letter (a):
a. Sufficient number of safety harness and sufficiently strong catchments points shall be available; and
b. The personnel shall always wear safety harness
5. !t is prohibited to get into the bottom of an unprotected shaft, unless for shaft sinking or working in the
shaft, and suitable safety precautions have been taken.
6. Rider stops along the shaft shall be provided with safety gate to ensure that no materials will fall into the
shaft, and the gate shall always be closed, except during loading and unloading works
7. Every rider stop shall be provided with an ample room for easy personnel, materials, and unloading
works.
8. Prop set or diverter shall be installed at each rail leading to the shaft opening and rider stops.
9. Loading and unloading facilities shall be such constructed that no material will fall into the shaft.

Article 311
Personnel Transportation through the Shaft, Winze, Raise, and Inclined Drift
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall provide sufficient and safe facilities for the mineworkers in using the shaft,
winze raise and inclined drift.
2. Shaft, Winze, raise and inclined drift of more than +5 meters deep shall be provided with hoisting
machine.

Article 312
Material and Ore Transportation through the shaft, winze raise and inclined Drift
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall arrange safety measurers for material and ore transportation through the shaft,
winze, raise, and inclined drift.

Article 313
Hoisting Machine and Its equipment
1. The hoisting machine its equipment shall:
a. Comply with the prevailing standard
b. Be of 5 bigger capacity than power needed to hoist a maximum loaded cage.
c. Be provided with a brake capable of retaining a maximum loaded cage at its lowest position in the
shaft and withstanding the hoist maximum pull power and provided with integrated safety facilities.
d. Be provided with cage position indicator
e. Be provided with emergency stop button in the hoist man control room
f. Be provided with automatic equipment to prevent the hoist from over traveling and over standing
unless otherwise determined by the chief mine inspector
g. Be provided with automatic brake capable of retaining the load safety in case the hoist cannot hoist
the load up.
h. Be provided with automatic audio signal which sounds when the cage is about to arrive at the rider
stop or at a distance of two cable windings
i. There shall be a remaining of three full windings of cable on the drum when the cage reaches the
lowest rider stop position
j. All hoist machine controls be easily by the hoist man from his control room and
k. Be provided with safety jerking absorber in case the cage slides freely into the shaft bottom

Article 314
Shaft Transportation
1. A cage shall not be used for personnel transportation if its construction allows accidental contact between
the riders and the shaft wall.
2. To prevent the cage from over traveling, it is necessary to install a device, which can stop and give a
good grip on the cage.
3. Prior to the cage construction and commissioning, its master plan shall be approved by the chief mine
!nspector.



Article 315
Rope Book
1. For every mine which utilizes hoisting machine, the Kepala Teknik Tambang shall provide a rope book to
register technical data of ropes, shaft, winze, raise and cage which are used in the main activity,
including the result of ropes inspection and testing
2. The records in the rope book shall always be up to dated, and the book shall be subjected to inspection
by the main inspector.

Article 316
Inspection Of Ropes and Safety Equipment
1. Outer part of the drive rope and idler rope shall be visually inspected at least once in a day for any
damage, and the results recorded.
2. At least once in a month, the commonly stretched and worn parts of the ropes, idler ropes, guide ropes,
and separating ropes shall be cleaned and inspected. The ropes diameters shall be measured at certain
points, and the results recorded.
3. Once in a month, the rope parts, which remain in the hoist drum when the cage is at its lowest position,
shall be inspected and greased. Damaged parts shall be cut off, with due attention to the provision in
article 313, letter (i).
+. At least once in a day, safety catches shall be inspected for cleanliness, grasp strength, and resistance
distance in accordance with the guidelines from the Kepala Teknik Tambang.
5. At least once in a quarter, the safety catches referred to in paragraph (+) shall be inspected and tested
by suddenly releasing the empty cage from any stop position to make sure that the safety catches can
grasp the guide ropes.
6. !f the safety catches referred to in paragraph (5) do not function properly, the cage may not be used
until repair is made.
7. Friction hoist installation shall be inspected and tested at least once in month for;
a. Rope elongation
b. Rope diameter and
c. Location and number of broken strands
8. The result of inspection and test referred to in paragraph (1), (2), (3), and (7) shall be recorded in the
ropes book and the implementation of paragraph (+) and (5) shall registered in the hoist book.
9. At least once in a year a through inspection shall be performed for any damage of hoist machine's parts
namely headgear pulley deflecting sheaves shaft bearing block and hoist ropes the inspection shall use
non destructive testing method and its result recorded in the mine book or reported to the Kepala Teknik
Tambang.

Article 317
Criteria of non Operation worthy ropes
1. !t is prohibit to use a hoist rope in a winze or raise when:
a. !ts strength has been reduced to 10 from its original strength
b. !ts elongation, indicated by shear strength test 60 smaller than the original shear strength test.
c. The number of broken wires in a standard is not more than six wires
d. The rope are rusty and
e. Elongation level of the friction hoist ropes exceed normal elongation level
2. !dler ropes guide ropes or separating ropes shall not be used when
a. !ts strength has reduced 25 from its original strength
b. !ts elongation indicated by shear strength test is 60 smaller than the original shear strength result
c. The number of broken wires in a standard is not more than six wires and
d. The ropes are rusty

Article 31S
Ropes Strength
1. A newly installed hoist rope to the cage shall have safety factor of 6 times cage maximum load capacity
2. The rope strength which is used to count safety factor shall be the strength registered on testing
certificate issued
3. Rope safety factor shall be counted from ropes dead weight acceleration friction power movement factor
and bending strength on a deflection.

Article 319
Hoist Rope
1. Safety factors of a newly installed hoist rope to the cage shall be counted in the following way.
a. For static calculation the result of rope strength test in relation to the cage's maximum load shall not
be less than 6 and
b. Dynamic calculation shall consider dead weight acceleration friction and bending strength on a
deflection and the result shall not be less than 5
2. The hoist rope as referred to in paragraph (1) shall not be used for more than two years
3. !f the result of inspection and test referred to in article 316 indicate the conditions referred to in article
317, the rope shall be replaced immediately albeit less than two years operation.
+. The date of the new ropes installation shall be recorded in the Ropes Book

Article 320
Hoist Rope Coupling
1. Coupling between the hoist rope and the cage shall not be of automatically detached type and it is
prohibited to use open catch
2. The coupling as referred to in paragraph (1) shall be approved by Kepala Teknik Tambang

Article 321
Rope Service Limit
1 !t is prohibited to use combined ropes for hoisting purpose
2 !t is prohibited to use ropes not certified by an official laboratory
3 !t is prohibited to use non specified ropes
+ !t is prohibited to use ropes unless a written approval has been obtained from the chief mine inspector
5 Ropes, which have been used for hoisting at one place, shall not be reused unless they were maintained
properly and the Kepala Teknik Tambang can ensure that the ropes are still safe to use.
6 !t is prohibited to change the position of rope end from being attached to the drum to being attached to
the cage unless a written approval has been obtained from the chief mine inspector.

Article 322
Rope Capping
1. !t is prohibited to use a rope capping for hoisting unless the capping has been made 6 months prior to its
use
2. !t is prohibited to use a rope capping if it's less than 90 of its original rope strength and a competent
person shall make it.



Article 323
Refitting Rope Capping
1. !t is prohibited to reuse a rope capping unless the original rope capping has been cut at least 2 meters
long
2. The cutting as referred to in paragraph (1) shall be disentangled and its core shall be result shall be
recorded in the rope book.

Article 324
Making Rope Capping
The rope ends which are disentangled and bent rearward to a cone shape shall not be used for personnel
transportation hoist unless mild iron wedge capping has been made between the disentangled ends of the
ropes and the length of the wedge capping shall not be less than eight times the ropes diameter.

Article 325
Ropes Lubrication
Ropes lubrication on the drum shall be adjusted to the operation condition every month or frequently to make
sure that the ropes are always well lubricated.

Article 326
Ropes Hoist Inspection
After 18 months service the ropes shall be semi annually cut a least 3 meters long from its lowest end
measured from the clamp or the like for testing and the result shall be recorded in the ropes book.

Article 327
Clamp Inspection
1. Linkage clamps of cage ropes and drum ropes on a newly installed hoist rope shall be in inspected by a
competent person appointed by Kepala Teknik Tambang
2. The clamps as referred to in paragraph (1) shall not be used before being trial tested twice up and down
with maximum load capacity and after being re-inspected for clamp connection. The result of the test
shall be satisfying
3. The hoist man shall record the trial test as referred to in paragraph (2) in the hoist book and the result of
clamp inspection shall be recorded in the ropes book.

Article 32S
Hoist man Control Room
1. Hoist man control room shall be such constructed that engine noise or other noises will not hinder the
hoist man from hearing signal
2. Hoist man control room shall be provided with emergency lighting
3. Entrance into the hoist man control room shall be under the permit of Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah

Article 329
Head Frame, Sheave and Drum
1. The head frame construction shall comply with the requirements to ensure that it can withstand the total
static and dynamic loads.
2. The head frame shall be of sufficient height to provide clearance for the cage to stop in case of over
traveling
3. Nain sheave and deflecting sheave shall match the rope's size and be well maintained
+. On a hoist plant the drum deflecting sheave shall match the type and length of ropes used.
5. The head frame shall be provided with an emergency exit in case of over traveling

Article 330
Hoist Man Requirement
1. The hoist man shall be at least 21 years old competent and authorized
2. Every hoist man shall not be declared physically and mentally fit by a doctor and a non-alcoholic nor
narcotics addict.
3. The hoist man shall not unless authorized move any control which can influence the hoist movement or
hinder hoist operation
+. The hoist man shall not delegate any duty to other personnel except to a competent person and in case
of emergency or to a person who is trained under supervisor of hoist man supervisor authorized by the
Kepala Teknik Tambang
5. The hoist man shall always be in the control room when personnel is are working underground
6. The hoist man shall not unless in emergency situation work more than eight hours a day
7. Overtime shall be a maximum of four hours and only given on Sundays or holiday before which the hoist
man shall take a rest for at least eight hours.

Article 331
Hoisting speed
1. The speed of personnel transportation hoist shall not except in case of emergency exceed 5 mfsec
2. The speed of personnel transportation hoist for each shaft shall be decided by Kepala Teknik Tambang
and its limit shall not be exceeded
3. Naximum acceleration and retardation shall not be more than 1.5mfsec
2
unless approved by the chief
mine inspector
+. The hoist shall be provided with automatic control to ensure that neither acceleration nor retardation
exceeds 1:5 mfsec
2
.

Article 332
Signals
1. Every shaft shall be provided with communication tools and signals connecting the hoist control room and
the shaft bottom, work level shaft opening and every rider stop.
2. !f the hoist uses electrical signal the hoist man shall always repeat the same signal
3. The signal referred to in paragraph (1) shall only be installed and operated in the cage
+. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish a uniform hoisting procedure, which shall be displayed at the hoist
control room and every rider stop floor.
5. Personnel working on the cage sheave and other vehicles to transport personnel and materials shall
understand the signal procedures.
6. !t is prohibited unless authorized, to give a signal indicating the stop and movement of the cage or
sheave
7. Besides the signal referred to in paragraph (1), audio communication tools, such as telephone, shall be
provided between every station and the hoist control room



Article 333
Hoist Specification
1. Drum hoist shall be provided with manufacture's specification regarding maximum tensile strength and
allowable maximum rated suspended load.
2. Friction hoist shall be provided with manufacturer's specification regarding allowable maximum rated
suspended load.
3. The hoist's load capacity shall not be increased unless a written approval has been obtained from the
Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 334
Personnel Transportation Hoist Permit
1. Before putting a personnel transportation hoist into operation, a written approval shall be obtained from
the Chief Nine !nspector
2. The hoist permit as referred to in paragraph (1) shall only issued if the hoist has complied with the
requirements herein, and has been inspected and tested by the Nine !nspector
3. The personnel transportation hoist permit shall only be effective for two years
+. The permit shall be legally null and void if the use of personnel transportation hoist in the future fails to
comply with the provisions herein.

Article 335
!t is prohibited to enter an underground mine via an abandoned shaft, raise, winze and inclined drift, unless
by the use of applicable safe method.

Article 336
Shaft Sinking
1. Personnel working in a shaft sinking activity shall be protected from any falling object.
2. Hoisting bucket shall be halted five meters before reaching the shaft bottom, waiting for the workers at
the shaft bottom to give signals of letting it down.
3. The workers at the shaft bottom shall be provided with a shelter for protection when the bucket is being
hoisted up and down

Article 337
Safety Precautions in Shaft Sinking
1. Shaft sinking shall be performed under supervision to ensure that it complies with the previously
prepared specification, plan, and master plan
2. Shaft sinking supervisor shall ensure that all works are performed safely
3. During the shaft sinking process, the shaft wall shall be lined with timber or cement for safety, and the
lining shall be installed anytime at a distance of not less than 1.5 meters from the shaft bottom.

Article 33S
Shaft Inspection Log Book
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall provide inspection logbook for each shaft, raise, winze, and inclined drift,
which shall be signed by the inspection personnel after recording the inspection results.
2. At least once in a week, the inspection result of each shaft shall be reported to and signed by the
supervisor in charge of shaft maintenance.
3. The result of hazardous event inspection and necessary repairs taken shall be recorded and signed by the
supervisor in charge of shaft maintenance.
+. The log book of shaft, raise, winze, and inclined drift inspection shall always be readily available
whenever needed by the Nine !nspector, and the names of inspection personnel shall be registered in the
Nining Book.

Article 339
Shaft General Inspection, Testing and Maintenance
1. Shaft !nspection, testing, and maintenance procedures, including hoist equipment shall be established
and improved all the time.
2. !f the inspection, testing and maintenance referred to in paragraph (1) indicate or suspect a malfunction,
the hoist shall not be operated until repair is made
3. After performing the repair referred to in paragraph (2), the personnel who performs the inspection,
testing, and maintenance shall:
a. Affix the date signature stating that the work has been performed well,
b. Record and date malfunction parts: and
c. Keep the certificate and records for one year
+. The spare parts used for the hoist repair shall comply with their original standard and quality.
5. At the beginning of each shift, the hoist man shall inspect the hoist machines over travel, dead man
pedal, position indicator, and brake condition.
6. At the completion of each hoist repair, or after a blast nearby the shaft, or if the hoist is not in operation
for one shift or more, the hoist shall be tested empty before being operated to transport personnel. The
test shall be recorded in the Nine Book.
7. Competent personnel shall inspect coupling between hoist rope and hoist drum, and cage anchor at least
once in 2+ hours.
8. Sheaves, which are use in the shaft, raise andfor winze, shall be inspected and greased weekly.
9. The result of inspection referred to in paragraph (8) shall be recorded in the shaft inspection Log Book
10. The name (s) of personnel performing the inspection referred to in this article shall be recorded in the
Nining Book.

Section Four
Hazardous Events
Article 340
Mine Surface
1. !n the event that a personnel working underground notes a hazard, he shall:
a. !mmediately order all underground mine workers to leave the work area;
b. !nform his line superior of the hazard and mine workers evacuation; and
c. After ensuring that no one has entered the hazardous zone, the appointed personnel shall inspect the
hazardous condition and take safety measures.
2. No one, except inspection and safety personnel, shall be allowed to enter the hazard area before it is
declared safe by the personnel in charge of the personnel in charge of the situation.
3. Nine workers who are related with the inspection and safety measure shall immediately:
a. Leave the hazard area
b. !nform other workers to leave the hazard area and
c. !nform the personnel in charge of the hazard area.
+. Safety measure and the time of safe confirmation shall be recorded in the mine book
5. !f the hazard referred to in paragraph (1) can jeopardize the safety of underground workers it shall
reported to the Kepala Teknik Tambang

Article 341
Evacuation in The Event of Underground Inrush and fire Outbreak
1. !n line with Fire Prevention regulation and if the fire is suspected to grow big, Kepala Teknik Tambang or
personnel in charge of underground work shall ensure that all workers are.
a. Evacuated from fire hazardous areas and
b. Evacuated from the fire hazardous area in accordance with the fire procedures or when the fire is
suspected to grow big or if the fire alarm sounds
2. The provision as referred to in paragraph (5) states that no one shall be allowed to enter the scene in
accordance with paragraph (1) before Kepala Teknik Tambang or Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah
declares the area safe.
3. Kepala Teknik Tambang or Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall perform inspection and report its result
to the map showing the affected areas referred to in paragraph (1)
+. The inspection results and the map referred to in paragraph (3) shall be displayed at certain places for
workers information
5. The provision referred to in paragraph (1) and shall (2) exempt:
a. Emergency rescuers
b. Fire fighters
c. Personnel who secure the area and
d. Personnel who inspect the area before the work is returned to normal
6. The provision referred to in paragraph (1) letter (b) shall not be applicable to the personnel assigned to
prevent the fire from spreading, although the fire will not result in direct hazard.

Article 342
Evacuation in the Event Inadequate Ventilation Gas Inrush and Other Hazards
1. Areas which are potentially affected by inadequate ventilation are:
a. Areas whose ventilation does not comply with general provision on ventilation and ventilation
standard
b. Areas of potential or imminent gas inrush
c. Areas which are potentially affected by other hazard, excluding inrush or fire outbreak as referred to
in article 3+1
2. The personnel referred to in article 3+1 paragraph (1) shall
a. Order all workers to evacuate to a safe place
b. Perform inspection and take necessary measure in the affected areas and
c. Prevent or forbid workers from entering or to enter the affected areas as referred to in paragraph (1)
until the areas are declared secure.
3. Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah or his representative shall ensure that the personnel in charge of
underground work has been informed of the inadequate ventilation gas in rush and other hazards
+. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall record the following in the mine book
a. Reason of evacuation
b. Condition of the affected areas and
c. Safety measure taken
5. The records referred to in paragraph (+) shall be displayed at certain places for workers information.
6. The provisions referred to in paragraph (2) letter (a) and paragraph (3) shall not be applicable to mine
workers who are allowed to enter the affected areas as referred to in paragraph (1) For the following
purposes:
a. Rescuing the workers
b. Performing the duties referred to in paragraph (2) letter (b)
c. Securing the affected area
d. Determining effectiveness of the measures taken and
e. Deciding whether the said area is safe for personnel entrance.


Section Five
Emission and in rush

Article 343
Data and Information on the mine Area.
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall possess updated data and information on a workplace and work plan,
including:
a. Work place and the abandoned surrounding places (whether mine opening or not)
b. Layer which contain or are suspected to contain water or gas and
c. Naterials to flow when wet
2. !f the work is affected by the presence of sea lake, river andfor other surface water (either naturally
accumulated or not), Kepala Teknik Tambang shall:
a. Determine composition and total thickness of the layers between mine opening and surface water
and
b. Ensure that the layers can give protection against the inrush of surface water

Article 344
Precautions
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall identify the potential sources of emission inrush and in burst, and take
preventive them from rushing into the mine area.
a. !t is prohibited to perform a work at a potential hazard area unless the Kepala Teknik Tambang
b. Besides the provision referred to in letter (a) Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that work
performed at potentially hazardous areas shall follow the plan to:
2. Prevent the occurrence of in rush emission and in burst and
3. Prepare safety measure to reduce the hazard due to in burst emission and in rush when they occur.
a. !f the provision referred to in letter (b) is applicable, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that the
copy of work procedure and their amendment shall be:
1. Kept in the mine office
2. Displayed at places easily visible by the workers and
3. Handed to the chief mine inspector at the latest of 30 days before the work commences or
sooner if specially required by the chief mine inspector
b. The provision referred to in letter (b) shall not be applicable if Kepala Teknik Tambang makes a
report to the chief mine inspector on unnecessary safety measures at least 30 days before the work
commences or in the event of any special matters allowed by the chief mine inspector.
+. !f there is any prediction of in burst emission and in rush into potential hazardous areas, which are being,
or to be worked, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall immediately inform the situation to the chief Nine
!nspector.

Article 345
Inspection Drilling
!n addition to the provision referred to in article 3++, it is prohibited to continue a work at a distance of +5
meters from a suspected source of in-rush, unless sufficient holes have been drilled to discharge the water
and gas.

Section six
Rock and Pillar Control

Article 346
General
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall control the movement of roof rock in an underground mining and, where
necessary, shall support an opening's roof and wall.


Article 347
Natural Support
1) Natural supports shall be available to protect the shafts and exit ways.
2) Natural supports shall be provided for safety in case of any lake, river and dam above the mining area.
3) Natural supports shall be provided in case in any public facilities above the mining area.
+) !n the events of any conditions referred to in paragraphs (1), (2), and (3), Kepala Teknik Tambang shall
send mine plan map, geology map or plan map to the Chief Nine !nspector.
5) The Chief Nine !nspector can change the size of natural supports referred to in paragraphs (1), (2), and
(3), including other requirements.
6) !t is prohibited to increase and reduce the size of natural supports, unless approved by the Chief Nine
!nspector.

Article 34S
Mine Boundary
1) Natural supports shall be provided along the intersection of ore layer and the bedrocks, unless the
bedrock is compact and strong.
2) Ore layer shall be taken as natural supports between one level to another, and between one blocks to
another, including crown pillar.

Article 349
Workface
1) Using undercut method if the ores are subject to instantaneous caving shall not perform mine operation.
2) The distance between workface and filling room shall be as close as possible, but still allow workers to
perform their job.

Article 350
Duties of Mine Workers
1. Underground mine workers shall be informed of the characteristic of instantaneous caving
2. !f imminent caving is predicted to occur hazardous signal shall be turned on and all workers shall leave
the workplace immediately
3. Nine workers shall inspect their workplace at the beginning of each shift
+. Loose rocks be destroyed or supported before the work commences in the area.
5. Operational supervisor shall observe the implementation of work guideline procedure and inspect
workplace condition underground mine road haulage way shall be tested periodically.

Article 351
Supporting
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish supporting principles for every mine opening
2. Supporting at each mine opening shall comply with the rock type and mine method
3. Pre installed support shall not be removed or altered unless it is ordered and performed under supervisor
+. Platform base roof prop set and the shall not be removed or altered if the action is subject to a hazardous
opening and shall only be done under a close supervisor
5. Supporting materials shall be sufficiently strong in sufficiently quantity and in ready for use condition.
6. !f the supporting materials are unavailable and workplace conditions hazardous all activities at the
workplace shall be stopped.
Article 352
Prop Set
1. Prop set in a active area shall be installed correctly and where needed it shall be wedge tightened for
maximum support
2. Every prop set for roof and workplace shaft or haulage way shall be installed on a strong base
3. Damaged loose or detached prop set crating an unsafe condition shall be immediately repaired or
replaced
+. Nine workers who are working at a production opening supported by cubical prop set shall ensure that
the floor is parallel with the cap especially after a blasting and where necessary the cubical prop set shall
be nailed
5. Cubical prop set on production opening shall be equipped with pigsties and pegs which are installed on
the wall and roof and top logging shall not be installed at the top part of the cubical prop set whereas
clearance between the top logging and rock shall be supported with pigsties or the pigsties shall be
installed on the vertical support on the cubical prop set.

Article 353
Rock Bolting
1. !f supporting is performed by rock bolting the bolts shall be installed immediately after the opening is
driven
2. Bolt testing procedures shall be made to access its strength and the results shall be recorded and kept in
the mine office
3. !f supporting is performed by grouted bolting its tightening torque shall not exceed the test result
+. Grouting force shall not exceed the anchoring strength

Article 354
Loose Rocks and Unconsolidated Rocks
1. Loose rocks shall be excavated or supported prior to commencing other work
2. Prior to performing the works referred to in paragraph (1) the potentially affected area shall be provided
with no entry" sign to prevent any personnel from entering and in the absence of attendant the area
shall be provided with barrier.

Article 356
Rock Destroying
1. Rocks shall be destroyed from a safe place.
2. !f the rock are to be destroyed manually long poles which are suitable for the works shall be provided
3. !f the rocks are destroyed by the use of a mechanical device sufficient protection roof shall be available.
+. !f the mechanical device used to destroy the rocks is equipped with bucket or oscillating platform the
bucket or platform movement shall be controlled by the person who conducts the rock destroyed works.

Article 357
Drilling Safety
1. Before drilling any workplace or roof a through inspection shall be performed against loose rocks and
then destroyed or supported where necessary.
2. !n performing the drill work the drill operator be protected from stone falling hazards
3. The person who assists collaring shall be stationed at a safe place
+. !f the workplace is supported the drilling shall only be performed from the supported workplace and
where necessary temporary support shall be linked with the supported areas.
5. On a mobile drill tower the drill operator and other personnel shall be provided with protection equipment
6. !f the drill machine is equipped with bucket or oscillating platform, the drill machine shall comply with the
referred to in article 356 paragraph (+)

Article 35S
Safety Precautions Against Rock Burst
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall take the following actions in case of rock burst:
a. Report it to the chief mine inspector within 2+ hours if the rock burst results in:
1. Nine workers evacuation
2. Disturbed ventilation
3. Nine roads blockage and
+. Nine activity distribution for more than 1 hour
b. Prepare and implement rock burst control plan within 90 (ninety) days after the rock burst
2. The rock burst control plan referred to in paragraph (1) letter (b) shall include
1. Work procedures, and mine methods, which are designed to reduce the occurrence of rock burst.
2. Rock burst monitoring procedures and
3. Other measures to reduce potential hazard for workers in a rock burst prone area
3. Rock burst monitoring plan referred to in paragraph (2) shall be updated in accordance with the mine
development, and chief mine inspector has the right to amend the work plan procedures

Article 359
Inspection of Rock Condition
The names of operational supervisors assigned by Kepala Teknik Tambang to inspect and test loose rocks
shall be registered in the mining book

Article 360
Warning Against Unsafe Condition
1. !n discontinues shifts unsafe condition during one shift shall be informed in writing to the next shift and
signed
2. The information referred to in paragraph (1) shall be read and signed by the leader of the next shift at
the shift beginning

Article 361
Company Regulation on supporting
1. !f the mine requires supporting facilities, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish company regulation on
supporting which shall show front sides and top views or supporting system diagram including installation
and removal procedures in a form easily understood by personnel who handles the support.
2. Copy of the company regulation referred to in paragraph (1) shall be attached at easily visible location
namely at every entrance into the supported workplaces.

Section Seven
Workplace Protection
Article 362
Workplace Protection
1. !t is prohibited to perform underground in a workplace where other mineworkers are working at the top
unless safety measures have been taken
2. !t is prohibited to assign mineworkers to work where roof wall and side rock layers can not be inspected
due to their altitude
3. Loading machine or loading hauling and dumping machine shall not be allowed to enter an opening if the
drivers position is not protected against any falling rocks from the roof wall and ore piles which can not
be inspected any if the loading machine or loading hauling and dumping (LHD) machine is operated by
remote control the equipment shall be visible by the remote control operator.

Article 363
Ore hopper and the like shall be of suitable size to prevent any blockage and its surroundings shall be
provided with safety device to prevent a person from falling into it.

Article 364
Shaft and Opening's Safety Devices
Top end of a shaft be fenced and provided with guard rail and every opening which is hazardous due to its
depth shall be fenced and provided with guard rail.

Article 365
Shaft Entrance Way
Opening at each level, which is connected to a shaft or winze, shall be provided with guardrail as referred to
in article 310 paragraph (6) and safety fence.

Article 366
Barrier and Warning Sign
!n addition to the provision referred to in article 308 the warning sign shall be conspicuous and indicates the
nature of hazard and other necessary measures.

Article 367
The opening of a road under repair or of hazardous shall be provided with no access" sign

Article 36S
Mine Closing
1. All opening or shaft which are to be abandoned shall be closed by filling or stooping
2. Every abandoned place, which is potentially hazardous, shall be provided with a fence of at least 80 cm
high.
3. The closing of underground mine shall be approved by the chief mine inspector

Section Eight
Ventilation

Article 369
General Provisions
1. For underground mine:
a. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that sufficient flow of clean air is available for workplace with
oxygen volume of not less than 19.5 and carbon dioxide volume of not less than 0.5
b. !t is prohibited to assign employees to workplaces where dust smoke and vapor concentration is
hazardous to health and
c. Airflow is sufficient to immediately reduce or eliminate blast smoke concentration.
2. !f flammable or explosive gas is found in the mine ventilation system Kepala Teknik Tambang shall take
special safety measures to overcome the hazardous condition.
3. The volume of clean air flowing in the ventilation system shall be:
a. Calculated based on the maximum number of workers in a workplace assuming that every worker
consumes not less than 2m
3
fminute during the work.
b. Added with 3m
3
fminute for each horse power when the diesel engine is in operation
+. The mine inspector can urge Kepala Teknik Tambang to improve the quality and volume of clean air flow
at a mine section
5. Re-circulation shall not be applied in a ventilation system.

Article 370
Ventilation Standard
1. Air temperature in an underground mine shall be maintained between 18-2+
o
c, with a maximum 80
relative humidity.
2. !n addition to the provision referred to in paragraph (1) letter (a) condition of ventilation at a workplace
shall be.
a. For an average of 8 hours:
i. Carbon monoxide (CO) volume shall not be more than 0.005;
ii. Nethane (CH
+
) volume shall not be more than 0.25
iii. Hydrogen sulfide (H
2
S) volume shall not be more than 0.001
iv. Nitrate dioxide (NO
2
) volume shall not be more than 0.0003
b. For every 15 minutes interval:
i. CO volume shall not be more than 0.0+ and
ii. NO
2
volume shall not be more than 0.0005
3. Use of safety lamp or other equipment of similar intendent use shall test oxygen volume.
+. Unventilated location shall be closed or posted with no entry" sign
5. The sealing wall of every confined location shall be provided with pipe equipped with air sampling valve
to measure the pressure inside the wall
6. ventilation air velocity to the workplace shall be at least 7 mfmin and is subject to escalation in
accordance with the work needs.
7. The size of airway shall be sufficient with the volume of intake air.
8. Kepala Teknik Tambang appoints a personnel in charge of supervising the mine ventilation and the
personnel's name shall be registered in the mine book.
9. The quantity and quality of air flowing to each workplace or location or ventilation system shall be
designed in an interval of not more than one month
10. Air flow measuring points shall meet the following requirements:
a. Every main intake airway shall be close to the intake airways or the return airway, when possible.
b. Every air dividing section shall be close to intersection when possible
c. At the first workplace, 50 meters from the intake airway and the last workplace 50 meters from the
return airway
d. The location of return airway shall be close to the main exit intersection when possible
e. Other places determined by the mine inspector
11. Sampling for measuring oxygen (O
2
) carbon dioxide (CO
2
) carbon monoxide (CO) and nitrate oxide (NO
2
)
in a normal work condition shall be taken in one month interval at the following points:
a. Neters from a drayage workplace
b. Neters from winze and shaft and
c. At the bottom of up cast shaft and at a production opening which has one entrance.
12. Sampling for determining carbon monoxide (CO) and nitrate dioxide (NO
2
) at each location are at each
road of diesel engine location shall be taken in an interval of not more than 7 days
13. The report of measurement referred to in paragraph (11) and (12) shall mention the mine and location of
sampling and the time of the last blasting.
1+. Regular temperature reading shall be taken from places referred to in paragraph (10) letters (c) and (d)
and weekly reading shall be taken when the effective temperature is above 2+
2
C.
15. The measurement of < 10 micron dust concentration shall be performed as frequent as possible at least
three times monthly or unless otherwise determined by the chief mine inspector
16. !f the alternation of air flow direction and diffusion affects the volume of intake and return air
measurement shall be performed soon after alternation is made
17. The result of air measurement referred to in paragraph (16) shall be recorded in the ventilation book.
18. ventilation measurement shall be performed by a competent person
19. Sampling as referred to in paragraph (11) and (12) shall not be performed if the chief mine inspectors
considers the mine ventilation is sufficiently good.

Article 371
Natural Ventilation
1. The use of natural ventilation shall be approved by the chief mine inspector
2. !f all mine sections continuously using natural ventilation, the provision referred to in article 369 and 070
shall be equipped with surface fan to be operated when needed
3. The mine inspector considering the mine size and workplace environment, has the right to determine the
necessity to prepare a mechanical auxiliary fan whose capacity is sufficient for supplying adequate air for
the workers need during and in case of evacuation.

Article 372
Fan
1. Surface fan shall whenever possible be provided with:
a. An auxiliary power source
b. Water gage
c. Automatic speed indicator or automatic pressure gage
d. Efficient air lock or regulator door
e. Flame resistant fan drift and fan house
f. Flame resistant duct and pressure reducing device
g. Air flow diverter which shall be tested regularly
h. Other safety devices determined by the chief mine inspector
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall inform the fan operator of its speed
3. The operator referred to in paragraph (2) shall test the fan, watch the water gage and other automatic
indicators in frequency of not less than 2 hours
+. !n the absence of automatic ventilation pressure recorder the fan operator shall record the fan speed and
pressure indicated by the speed indicator and water gage in every 2 hours
5. The operator referred to in paragraph (2) shall report to his supervisor for:
a. Every failure, malfunction and inoperable condition of the fan and
b. Unusual pressure variation indicated by the water gage.
6. Every unattended surface fan shall be provided with permanent monitoring device to transmit early
warning sign of the fan malfunction to an attended work station
7. !ntake airway to the fan shall be provided with screen or filter
8. The mine inspector upon considering the mine size and workplace condition can establish installation of
auxiliary fan which can be put into operation whenever necessary.
9. Surface fan cover and the duct connecting the fan and mine openings fan house and other buildings
nearby the fan shall be made of flame resistant materials and if made of flammable materials the
buildings nearby the fan shall be protected from fire hazard
10. Returning airway shaft, which is connected, to the drift or duct leading to the fan shall be provided with
air lock or regulator door to prevent airflow from short-circuiting.
11. !t is prohibited to erect a flammable building in a distance less than 50 meters from the fan house
12. Underground auxiliary fan shall be provided and other fans can also be !nstalled upon approval of the
chief mine inspector and shall not disturb the health and safety of underground mine inspector.
13. The main fan control room shall be on the surface protected independent and separated from the fan
house and the auxiliary electric generator shall be at ground surface
1+. !t is prohibited to turn the ventilation fan off unless approved by the ventilation supervisor.
15. !t is prohibited to install underground auxiliary fan unless ventilation measurement has been performed
16. The fan intending for supplying air to the workplace in an underground mine shall always be in operation
when the workers are working underground except on a planned non production day or during the fan
maintenance or adjustment all workers in areas affected by the ventilation shall be informed in advance
of the fan shutdown overhaul and maintenance blasting shall be prohibited when the fan is damaged or
being shutdown.
17. ventilation shall be brought back to normal operation before returning the workers to the areas effected
by the fan operation
18. The fan maintenance shall be performed in accordance with manufacturer's specification or written
schedule prepared by the Kepala Teknik Tambang.

Article 373
Ventilation Fan System
1. Prior to installing underground auxiliary fan, Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall ensure that sufficient air
is reaching the auxiliary fan to prevent air from re-circulating, and that the air reaching the auxiliary fan
is not contaminated with dust, smoke or toxic gas.
2. The auxiliary fan shall be provided with safety earthling device
3. The auxiliary fan shall be operated only by an authorized operator
+. The auxiliary fan shall be installed at a distance less than one meter from the nearest entrance to the
areas to be ventilated
5. !f to fans or more are installed in series, the provision referred to in paragraph (+) shall only be
applicable for one of the them
6. Blower-type auxiliary fan shall be installed at the intake airways, and suction type auxiliary fan shall be
installed at the return airways
7. The auxiliary fan shall be provided with a duct with the length of five times of the square root of the
cross section area
8. !f the auxiliary fan is not operating the mineworkers shall be prohibited to enter areas, which are
ventilated by the inoperable fan until the area is declared safe by operational supervisor.
9. Pressurized air shall not be used merely for ventilation purpose, except for steep and narrow inclined
roadways
10. Rise ventilation shall be provided with airflow regulating valve to flow air from the raise bottom. A raise
which is under repair shall be equipped with two air flow regulating valves, one at the lower end and the
other at the upper end of the pipe
11. ventilation pipe of the raise shall be installed independently, and its pipe end shall be provided with
diffuser.
12. !f the ventilation utilizes pressurized air, samples shall be taken monthly to observe CO, NO2, and fuel
moist content. Pressurized air shall not be used for ventilation if the measurement exceeds the limit
referred to in article 370 paragraph (2).



Article 374
Ventilation Circuit
1. Nain intake airways and return airways shall be constructed in different shafts or drifts
2. The Chief Nine !nspector can grant exception in deviation from the provision referred to in paragraph (1)
3. Shaft ventilation shall only be provided under the following condition:
a. Diffuser may be used at the same opening in the construction of vertical or inclined shaft sinking.
b. !ntake airways and return airways shall be provided with curtain wall.
+. !ntake fresh air to the downcast shaft be well distributed to all workplaces in accordance with the
workplace requirements
5. !n the presence of ventilation circuit malfunction or unusual alteration of air flow, underground
mineworkers shall report to the operational supervisor or Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah
6. All airways shall be free from any obstacle for smooth airflow.

Article 375
Air Leak Prevention
1. Shaft or surface diverge which is connected by tunnel to the surface fan, and which is usually used for
hoisting and transportations, shall be provided with efficient and well-maintained air locks.
2. Diverge which connects main intake airways and main return airways, or which connects intake and
return airways, shall be provided with sufficient and well-maintained air locks to reduce leakage to the
minimum level possible and, if these are not working, other methods shall be applied.
3. Drivege, which shall be prevented from air short-circuiting, shall be provided with a least two sufficiently
strong and well-maintained air locks. !f two air locks are inapplicable, one air lock with one or two curtain
wall (s) shall suffice.
+. There shall be a clearance between the air locks and curtain wall(s) to ensure that when one air lock or
curtain wall is opened, other air lock or curtain wall is still closed to prevent air from escaping.
5. The air locks shall close automatically and the curtain wall shall be of flame resistant construction.
6. !t is prohibited to chock the air lock open except when transportation is passing. Air locks, which are not
necessarily closed, shall be detached and such stored that they do not disturb airflow.
7. Everyone passing the air lock or curtain wall shall close it properly
8. Only authorized personnel shall be allowed to alter ventilation regulator

Article 376
Ventilation Planning
!n addition to the provision referred to in article 19, ventilation planning shall include the following
information:
1. The name of the mine; and
2. Up-to date maps or series of maps with a scale not more than 1: 5000, which indicated:
a. Air flow direction and distribution;
b. Location of the main fan, booster fan, and auxiliary fan;
c. Location of air lock (regulator door), curtain wall, and ventilation doors;
d. Location of up cast and downcast, and other casts.
e. Location of curtain wall of abandoned workplace;
f. Location of unventilated areas;
g. Location of workshop, fuel storage, hoist station, compressor, battery charging room, and explosives
magazine; and
h. Location of permanent air measurement and location of the latest air volume measurement.
3. Data of the main fan, booster fan and auxiliary fan, including manufacturer name, type, size, speed,
blade size, pressures at some points and brake power;
+. Number and type of fuel consuming underground vehicles, including their horse power; and
5. Other information required by the Chief Nine !nspector.

Section Nine
Mine Water Drainage

Article 377
General Efforts
1. Underground workplace shall be:
a. Free from water accumulation or flow which can jeopardize the workers; and
b. Provided with water drainage system to disperse excessive water by means of dewatering pump.
2. Positive displacement water pump shall be provided with regulating valve or other methods
3. Effort shall be taken to eliminate water accumulation in the coal hopper or raise, where materials will
block the water flow
+. Production opening or temporary ore stockpiles shall be provided with water drainage system, except
when the stockpile is able to drain the water effectively.
5. !f the rainwater affects the water level in the mine, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall monitor the rainfall, and
efforts shall be previously taken to prevent mine water flow from increasing.
6. Transportation road shall be provided with effective water drainage system to ensure the rails and
sleepers are not stagnated.

Article 37S
Dam and Bulkhead
1. !n the effort of making preventive measures against flood and other hazard, safety measures shall be
taken by building bulkhead or dam to control water and protect the mine and emergency exits.
2. The bulkhead referred to in paragraph (1) shall be a construction built to plug the water or block
pressurized water which are covering at the tunnel; drift and other openings.
3. The dam referred to in paragraph (1) shall be a construction built to block water in the tunnel or other
mine openings to ensure that the water flow can be controlled.
+. !t is prohibited to built a more than 75-ton capacity dam in the mine unless its location and plan
specification approved by the Chief Nine !nspector.
5. !f blasting is performed at a workface nearby the workplace and the blast is liable to accumulate water,
the bulkhead and dam referred to in paragraph (1) shall be closed properly.

Article 379
Controls Against Toxic Gas
!f the water accumulation in a blind winze is being drained, an effort shall be taken to prevent the air from
being polluted by toxic gas, due to interaction with water.

Article 3S0
Safety Measures at the Shaft Bottom
Shaft bottom shall be provided with barrier to prevent personnel transportation cage from contacting the
shaft water level.

Section Ten
Transportation

Article 3S1
Cable transportation in a decline or incline of steeper than 3 degree and whose driving terminal is located on
the surface, shall be regarded as shaft hoisting transportation as referred to in article 310-339.
Article 3S2
Transportation Regulation
1. !n addition to the provision referred to in chapter !v, section Four, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish
company's underground transportation regulation which can ensure:
a. Safe operation of every transportation system; and
b. Avoidance of personal injury caused by the use of transportation system.
2. The Nine !nspector can amend the company's transportation regulation if the regard it necessary for the
workers' safety as long as no in contradiction with the regulation herein.
3. The regulation referred to in paragraph (1) shall be displayed at the mine office, and its copies shall be
distributed to all transportation personnel. !n case of language barrier, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall
establish regulation here to.

Article 3S3
Transportation Road
1. Every mine road which is used for the transportation system shall be such planned, built, and maintained
that:
a. There is no sudden alteration in height, direction, width or inclination, which is liable to create
hazard.
b. Road dimension is of sufficient width and height to ensure that side, wall and roof clearances in
relation with locomotive parts, vehicle or load can prevent hazard from happening, or in line with
minimum clearance regulated herein.
2. !t is prohibited to walk along the mine road which is used for transportation system, unless clearance is
sufficient for pedestrian safety
3. Locomotive or steered vehicle shall not pass over a pedestrian, unless the person is in a protected place
(shelter hole)
+. The clearance referred to in paragraph (1) letter (b) shall be:
a. Nm vertical to the locomotive or vehicles roof or load, and 2.1-meter perpendicular, calculated from
the floor of roofless locomotive.
b. 600 mm horizontal from the load wall and the walls of locomotive or vehicles, or the load. !f the
clearance of a road part less than 600 mm, the road length shall not is less than 30 meters, and the
road end shall be sign posted.
c. For a double railed-transportation system, the distance between the lorry and its load shall not be
less than 600 mm, and the distance at the loading or trailing points shall not be less than 900 mm.
d. For an open permitted personnel transportation vehicle, the vertical clearance shall be a minimum of
2. 1 meters, counted from the vehicle's floor;
e. For a locomotive transportation or-suspended transportation, the vertical clearance between the
road's base and vehicle's base shall be at least 300 mm
f. For a steered vehicle, the minimum clearance from the road shall not be less than the vehicle width,
plus 1200 mm
5. Transportation tunnels for steered vehicles shall be obstacles-free, minimum slip risk, of limited cross
gradients and its curve corner shall provide adequate clearance to ensure undisturbed vehicle stability.
6. Road intersection shall be provided with safety fence to prevent the vehicle from hitting the barrier
7. Up to a distance of 250 meters from every workplace, the provision on transportation tunnel clearance
referred to in this, article shall not apply.

Article 3S4
Rail Road Construction
1. All main rails shall be installed strongly and rigidly.
2. The rail shall weight at least 17 kg per meter, and if the locomotive shaft or vehicle together with its load
is more than 5 tons or if the speed is more than 20 km per hour, the rail shall weight not less than 25 kg
per meter.
3. The rails shall be well coupled and provided with sleepers at an interval of not more than 80 mm. The
sleepers shall be flat and laid on a dry location.

Article 3S5
Lateral Gradient of Transportation Tunnel
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that mine transportation system is not performed on inclines who
steepness:
a. !s hazardous; or
b. Exceeds maximum lateral gradient recommended by the manufacturer.
2. !n addition to the provision referred to in paragraph (1), iron-wheeled locomotive transportation system
shall not be allowed on a road of more than 1: 20 gradient.
3. On an incline road, the vehicle's maximum load shall not exceed the safe limit when the vehicle is
restarted or topped at inline road.
+. vehicle running on a rail of 1:+ gradient shall be provided with dead man lock
5. !t is prohibited to drive a steered vehicle on a more than 1:5 gradients. Brake retardations ability for a
steeper than 1:5 gradient shall be tested at least every three months and when possible the test is
conducted with the trail attached.

Article 3S6
Shelter Hole
1. When deemed necessary shelter holes shall be provided at easily accessible intervals
2. The distance between the shelter holes referred to in paragraph (1) shall be:
a. On a rail system controlled by operator on the front section of the cars, the shelter holes' distance
shall not be more than:
1. Neters for a vehicle of not more than 25 kfh and with headlight; and
2. Neters for more than 25 kfh speed vehicle and more than 1:30 gradient, with limited operator's
visibility.
b. Not more than 20 meters for other rail vehicle; and
c. For steered vehicle:
1. The interval shall not be more than 90 meters if the vehicle speed not more than 20 kfh
2. The interval shall not be more than +0 km if the road gradient is more than 1:15 or the
operator's visibility is limited due to curves.
3. The shelter hole size shall be at least 1.8 meters wide, and not less than 1.5 deep.
+. The shelter hole shall be always be safe and obstacles-free, and provided with sign visible from a
minimum distance of 50 meters by the use of the miners lamp.
5. The shelter hole shall be as close as possible to the car trailing; ventilation door and curve end
with limited visibility.
6. Junction leading to sufficiently spacious room or place along the transportation tunnel can be
regarded as shelter hole.

Article 3S7
Transportation Equipment
1. Locomotive, steered-vehicle or static engine hauling equipment shall not be used if they do not comply
with the master plan and construction guidelines laid down by the Chief Nine !nspector.
2. Before putting a transportation system into operation, it shall be ensured that:
a. The transportation system is accordance with its intended use and objective;
b. The transportation system shall be provided with a device capable of stopping and retarding the
whole transportation section; and
c. All equipment used as the part of transportation system shall be planned, built and installed properly.


Article 3SS
Combustion Engine
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall:
a. Ensure that no combustion engine, except diesel engine, shall be used as transportation system's
prime mover.
b. Lay down provision which ensures that exhaust gas emission of every diesel engine is monitored in a
frequency of not more than 7 working days; and
c. Ensure that diesel engine's exhaust gas is hazardless.
2. The monitoring referred to in paragraph (1) letter (b) shall be applicable for exhaust gas samples which
are not contaminated by the mine air in the following conditions:
a. The diesel engine is running in low idle; and
b. The diesel engine is running in high idle.
3. The result of sample inspection referred to in paragraph (2) shall be recorded in a special book.
+. The diesel engine shall not be operated if the exhaust gas referred to in paragraph (2) letter (b) contains
more than 2 of carbon monoxide or more than 0,1 nitrogen oxide, or exceeds manufacturer specified
concentration level
5. The cooled and diluted exhaust gas of diesel engine within the mine shall not contain carbon monoxide
and nitrogen oxide concentration of more than 0.01 and 0.0005 respectively.
6. !t is prohibited to operate combustion engine in place or road where carbon monoxide and nitrogen oxide
concentration exceed 0.005 and 0.0003 respectively.

Article 3S9
Refueling Battery Charging, and Vehicle Parking
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that all prime-moved vehicles within the mine area shall be serviced
at certain locations, and parked at safe areas when not in operation.
2. Parking area, battery charging room, and refueling station only be used in accordance with its special
intended use and separated from one to another.
3. Every parking area or refueling station shall be generally constructed from fire-proof materials and
possess:
a. At least two separated exits;
b. Sufficient ventilation to suppress the diesel engine or battery exhaust gas concentration;
c. Sufficient illumination;
d. Flat concrete floor;
e. Facilities for locomotive and other vehicles' underpants;
f. Clean water reserve;
g. Waste disposal facility;
h. Smoke; heat or other detectors to give hazard signals in case of fire;
i. Sufficient number of fire extinguishers suitable for handling all fires, placed close to the entrance way
at easily visible and accessible location, and in ready- for use condition; and
j. Safety bund surrounding the refueling station.
+. Diesel engine vehicle or locomotive shall be refueled at the designated refueling station; and
a. The refueling facilities shall prevent the fuel from spilling over; and
b. The engine shall be turned off during refueling and topping up oil
5. Locomotive battery shall be charged in the battery charging room which complies with the provision
referred to in paragraph (3), except letter (e), and the battery chargers shall be:
a. Positioned to the side of battery compartment entrances;
b. Provided with current leak detector;
c. Provided with battery maintenance facilities to reduce electrolyte spill over
6. The provision referred to in this article shall not be applicable for traction locomotive battery which is
charged by overhead by conductor, in provision that battery charging operation will not result in electric
hazard and flammable gas.

Article 390
Fuel and Lubrication Oil Reverse and Storage
1. Fuel shall only be stored in the fuel station, in a quantity of not more than +8 hours consumption.
2. The types of underground consumption fuel shall be reported to the Chief Nine !nspector.
3. Underground transportation of fuel or lubrication shall be performed by the use of a tightly-closed and
conspicuously signed barrel or tank
+. Used fuel and oil lubrication barrels shall be immediately taken out of the mine.
5. Underground consumption lubrication oil shall only be stored in the fuel station, and the quantity of each
oil type shall only be sufficient for one-week consumption.

Article 391
Personnel Transportation
1. Nine personnel transportation vehicle shall be constructed, installed, maintained, and used in accordance
with the transportation guidelines established by the Chief Nine !nspector
2. At the latest of two years after the enforcement of this regulation, the existing personnel transportation
system shall comply with the provision referred to in paragraph (1).
3. The passenger of personnel transportation vehicle shall not be allowed to bring work tools, except hand
tools, aboard.

Article 392
Lost Control Prevention
1. To prevent any accidents resulted by a lost control, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall perform the followings:
a. !nstall a number of automatic equipment on the transportation system used to stop a lost control
vehicle;
b. Provide shelter holes at certain locations along the tunnel for personnel protection;
c. !nstall an equipment which can prevent vehicles from colliding in a tunnel junction
d. !nstall retainers separated from the tunnel support; and
e. On each trail, install a safety device to prevent the trail from reversing when not connected with it he
transportation system.
2. Every transportation system shall be provided with a retaining device, which can absorb hazardous shock
when the vehicle run lost control.

Article 393
Communication
1. Tunnel which is served by cable transportation shall be provided with:
a. A device to stop the transportation safely;
b. A device which can prevent the transportation vehicle from moving automatically, installed at certain
interval of less than 50 meters; and
c. A signal device connected to control room and installed at predetermined places.
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that:
a. Every transportation road are provided with communication means between vehicle stops, connection
points, control room and all embarkation points
b. Certain places are provided with suitable and effective visual signal equipment or radio
communication for the interest of the transportation operators.
3. The vehicle shall ride off only after the operator receives signals, with the following conditions:
a. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish the signal uniformity;
b. Of the whole codes, one time signal shall: stop".
c. Every personnel transportation vehicle shall be provided with a ride-off signal.
d. All signals shall be audible and visible by the operator
e. During a stop, the operator shall not neglect any unclear signal and shall not move the vehicle until
the clear signal is given.
+. Every rope haulage either endless rope or main and tail rope haulage system, shall be provided with pre-
operation audio signals installed at the return pulley and at other places along the system, and at a
remote controlled engine.

Article 394
Pre-Operational Inspection and Test
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be assisted by a sufficient number of competent personnel to perform
inspection and test of the mine haulage installation and operation.
2. The personnel referred to in paragraph (1) shall:
a. !nspect and test, and ensure that the haulage system is safe for operation; and
b. Prepare report of inspection and test results and hand it to the Kepala Teknik Tambang.
3. !n addition to the aims referred to in paragraph (1), Kepala Teknik Tambang can forbid the
commencement of a haulage system until he is sure of its safety.

Article 395
Haulage System Operation
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall guarantee that the mine haulage system is safe
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be assisted by competent personnel to supervise the haulage system
operation.
3. Every haulage system shall be operated by or under supervision of the competent personnel referred to
in paragraph (2).
+. Hauling machine operator shall:
a. Not get out the operator cabin when the vehicle is moving; and
b. Naintain cleanliness and lubricate the hauling vehicle he is operating.
5. !f the operator notes any malfunction, he shall stop the machine and discontinue operating.
6. Locomotive operator shall:
a. Not start the locomotive engine if he is not in his seat;
b. Not leave the cabin unless the locomotive is completely stopped and the ignition key is removed.
c. Sound the signal before starting the locomotive; and
d. Reduce speed when:
1. Noting pedestrian on the path;
2. Passing a curve, loading point or shaft;
3. Passing a workplace or rider stop, and ventilation door.
+. Passing ventilation sours
7. The locomotive shall not pass a rider stop when the workers are embarking or debarking the cage or
skip.
8. A steered vehicle shall not be used to drive a rail-mounted vehicle.

Article 396
Testing, Inspection and Maintenance
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall appoint in writing a number of competent personnel to perform regular
inspection, establish regulation to ensure that testing, inspection, and maintenance are sufficiently
performed against;
a. Underground rail and transport road; and
b. Equipment constituting the part of transportation system.
2. The result of inspection referred to in paragraph (1) shall be recorded and kept properly.
3. The Nine !nspector can amend the company regulation referred to in paragraph (1).
+. !nspection and testing frequency shall not exceed the following provisions:
a. Haulage road, rail and free sides area shall be in inspected at least once in a week or once in a day
for personnel transportation system.
b. Outer part of locomotive, permanent hoist at a certain location, and steered vehicle shall be
inspected at the beginning of each shift.
c. Permanent part engine, electric locomotives, and hoist engine and steered vehicle shall be inspected
at least once in a week.
d. Diesel engine's fireguard shall be inspected, cleaned, and replaced every 2+ hours if it is of
disposable type.
e. Parking brake, emergency brake, and locomotive and steered vehicles shall be inspected at least
once in a week to ensure efficient brake maintenance; and
f. !f the rope-wound transportation is used for personnel transportation:
1. !nspected overrun indicator once in a day;
2. !nspected and adjust over speed indicator once in a day;
3. Test over-travel control once in a month;
+. Test engine and vehicle's brake once in a week; and
5. Test engine dynamism and vehicle's brake every six months.

Article 397
Ropes and Pulley
1. New pulling ropes, which are fully operated underground, shall comply with the work guidelines adopted
from construction plan standard of underground haulage system.
2. All ropes shall be inspected and greased at interval given in the maintenance schedule, and the
inspection results shall be recorded in the Ropes Book by personnel whose name is (are) registered in the
Nine Book.
3. Pulling ropes along the haulage system shall be well supported by idler pulleys. The idler pulleys shall be
maintained for free turning and, when necessary, the pulling ropes shall be guided to the pulley.
+. On a curve or uneven road, the idler pulleys shall such placed that prevents the ropes from swinging,
which enable to jeopardize or obstruct the roof support or other equipment along the haulage road.
5. All capping of the underground pulling ropes hall be replaced in a frequency of not more than six months
under a close supervision of the appointed supervisor.
6. Haulage system, which uses endless ropes or vehicles, coupled to the ropes by clamp, chain, or other
devices, the coupling shall be inspected regularly in accordance with maintenance guidelines established
by the Kepala Teknik Tambang.
7. On an endless-ropes transportation system where the personnel haulage vehicles are permanently couple
to the ropes, the vehicles shall be moved at least to the length of the vehicle, and inspected every three
months.

Article 39S
Electric Continuity
1. All rails shall be of continues electricity conductor design, and:
a. Every rail couplings shall be provided with a copper conductor connection.
b. Electric resistance of the rail couplings shall not exceed the rate of electric resistance of 10-meter
long rail.
c. Every 100-meter interval of two rails forming a haulage rail shall be interconnected by a copper
conductor of the same cross section as that of aerial cable.
d. Two separate rail path shall be electrically connected at an interval of 200 meters; and
e. Every path's rail shall be earthed to the surface.
2. Only negative pole of a direct current shall be connected to the rail axle, and no switches or fuses shall
be attached to the connection.
3. !f two aerial cables or more are installed in parallel from the same pole, the conductor shall be electrically
connected a t every 30 meters intervals.
Article 399
Clearance to Aerial Cable
1. vertical clearance between the rail's upper part and the aerial cable shall be a minimum of 2.2 meters.
2. Clearance of un-insulated connector and capacitors of an aerial cable shall always be at least 110 mm
from the tunnel roof or rail slides, and from any other equipment installed on the road.
3. Clearance between life aerial cable to upper part of the locomotive, vehicle or its load shall be at least
300 mm, except for the trolley.

Article 400
Safety Measures
1. The operator shall not leave the cabin unless the ignition switch has been removed and control lever
released, or the pantograph released and secured.
2. Automatic fuse of each locomotive shall be such arranged that the manufacturer-specified operating
current be not exceeded.
3. The aerial cable shall be such installed that when the rock layer slides and narrows to 10 of the road
height, the aerial cable is still relatively safe.
+. Loading and unloading points, trailing point, and rider stops shall not be located under the aerial cable is
protected or secured and is sufficient clearance to avoid any accidental contact.

Section Eleven
Conveyor Belt Haulage

Article 401
General
1. The provisions referred to in article 382-397 shall also be applicable to underground belt conveyor.
2. !t is prohibited to ride the conveyor chain, belt or bucket unless they are intended for personnel
transportation and in accordance with the regulations established by the Chief Nine !nspector.
3. !f the conveyor belt is used permanently, the conveyor belt tunnel shall be sufficiently illuminated and
guarded to prevent hazard from any material falling from the conveyor belt.

Article 402
Conveyor Belt Haulage Road and Its Clearance
1. Every road used for belt conveyor haulage shall have a clearance of 600 mm on the pedestrian-passing
side, and 100 mm on the other sides. At transfer point or conveyor personnel points, the clearance shall
be at least 900 mm.
2. !f other vehicles are operating along with the conveyor belt, the clearance between that conveyor belt
and the vehicle shall comply with the regulation applicable to the vehicles.
3. !f the tunnel is used only by the conveyor belt haulage system, shelter holes shall not be needed.
+. Crossing bridges shall be provided at necessary points along the conveyor belt, and crossing the conveyor
belt shall only be allowable at the predetermined points.
5. Elevated conveyor, which is frequanted by personnel, shall be provided with non-slippery walking path
and handrails, and crossing paths beneath the conveyor belt shall be provided with safety devices.
6. Elevated conveyor, under which workers and vehicles are passing, shall be provided with safety wire
mesh or safety fences.

Article 403
Inclined Conveyor Belt
1. !nclined conveyor belt shall be provided with a brake to prevent the belt from sliding down freely.
2. The conveyor belt shall not be installed at inclination, which will allow the materials to flow back.

Article 404
Communications and Signals
1. !f the whole length of the conveyor belt is visible from the control switch, the operator, before operating
the conveyor belt, shall ensure that all personnel are in the safe place.
2. !f the whole length of the conveyor belt is not visible from the control switch, or if the conveyor belt is
automatically operated, audio and visual signals shall be provided.
3. Warning signals shall be given immediately before putting the conveyor belt into operation.
+. The warning signals shall be audible or visible from both belt ends, every transfer point, loading and
crossing points.
5. !f the conveyor belt is operated automatically or by a remote control, it shall be operating from the
feeding end to the receiving end to the receiving end sequence, and warning signs shall be given before
putting the conveyor belt into operation.
6. Emergency ropes shall be provided at easily accessible locations along the conveyor belt to stop the
conveyor belt in case of emergency.
7. The emergency ropes referred to in paragraph (6) shall be:
a. Conspicuous and easily accessible; and
b. Provided with manual reset switches installed at a maximum interval of 100 meters to stop the
conveyor belt and give signals to the belt controller, unless otherwise determined by the
manufacturer.
8. Every control, feeding, and receiving, and other points of a conveyor belt as referred to in paragraph (+)
shall be provided with verbal communication tools.
9. Warning signal shall be given before putting the conveyor belt into operation, and the control signal
system shall be interlocked to prevent the conveyor belt from operating before the warning sign is given.
10. The communication tools shall be properly installed for easy visibility and provided with clear operating
instructions.
11. The provisions in this shall be installed at the conveyor belt's drive motor, head pulley and idler pulley.

Article 405
Conveyor Belt Safety
1. Safety fences shall be installed at the conveyor belt's drive motor, head pulley and idler pulley.
2. Suspended conveyor belt, which can endanger other persons due to cutting off or breakage, shall be
provided with safety net underneath.
3. Underground conveyor belt shall be provided with:
a. Excessive slip detector between conveyor belt and drive motor unless a personnel is assigned to
continuously attend the belt.
b. Heat or smoke detector or automatic fire extinguisher at the drive motor, unless a personnel is
assigned to continuously attend the belt
c. A device to detect belt slippage and tear and hopper blockage and
d. Temperature monitor and brake and coupling position adjuster when necessary
+. The devices referred to in paragraph (3) letters (a), (c), and (d) shall be capable of stopping the belt
automatically and the detector referred to in paragraph (3) letter (b) shall be capable of giving signals to
inhabited places.
5. !n case that the operating safety device stops the conveyor belt, it shall only be recommenced
automatically if the safety device indicates normal condition for the belt decommissioning, automatic
decommissioning shall only be performed three times consecutively in every incidents.



Article 406
Conveyor Belt on Coal Face
The following provisions shall apply to a conveyor belt installed on the coalface or coal workplace
preparation:
a. At not more than 7 meters interval, lockable stop button or similar device shall be installed to give signal
to the belt operator.
b. The belt shall be provided with audio signal audible from along the conveyor belt operator.
c. The audio signal shall be sounded before the conveyor belt is operated and loaded.

Article 407
Maintenance
1. No repair or maintenance shall be performed when the conveyor belt is in operation.
2. During the repair the conveyor belt shall be shut down drive motor turned off warning tag attached and
the equipment locked unless the work natures require the belt operation and safety measure have been
taken to prevent the workers from any moving part hazard accident
3. When the belt is in operation it is prohibited to:
a. Clean the pulley and roller manually
b. Dress the belt manually unless safety devices have been installed to prevent people from any hazard.

Article 40S
Inspection and Testing
1. During the belt operation, it shall be inspected at not less than 2+ hours interval by operational
supervisor or competent personnel appointed by the Kepala Teknik Tambang
2. The inspection referred to in paragraph (1) shall be aimed at ensuring that the belt is free from any
obstacle, damage, and friction heat during its operation.
3. At underground mines where minerals are flammable, the materials haulage road shall be inspected
against any intensifying heat and dust accumulation hazard.
+. Fire prevention equipment and accessories along the conveyor belt shall be inspected and maintained the
inspection shall be performed:
a. After the conveyor belt's major maintenance;
b. Two hours after shut down;
c. Prior to any day-off;
d. At interval determined by the Kepala Teknik Tambang.
5. !f the inspection personnel find any damage or heat, which is liable to incite a fire, he shall take
necessary control measures or immediately report it to the Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah.
6. Prior to any non-production days, conveyor belt electricity shall be cut off and locked.
7. The personnel inspecting the conveyor belt shall:
a. Be capable of operating portable fire extinguisher;
b. Be capable of operating and stopping the conveyor belt; and
c. Know the contact person in case of any damage or malfunction.

Section Twelve
Raise Climbers

Article 409
Construction and Equipment
1. Drive-Powered raise climber shall possess:
a. Least two separate brakes, where:
1. One of them shall as close as possible to the end of drive system;
2. Both are capable of stopping or retaining a maximum loaded raise climber; and
3. Both shall allow separate testing.
b. Naximum load shall not exceed the manufacturer's specification. The maximum load shall be written
on the equipment and at the operation scene.
c. The raise climber shall be provided with over travel control. !f the skip is quite long, effective
communication tool shall be provided between the raise operator and the attendant.
2. Electrically-powered raise climber shall be provided with:
a. Current leak safety devices;
b. !solating switch and fuse near the personnel assigned to isolate the drive motor; and
c. Control switches installed at the raise climber
3. The raise climber's cage shall be provided with mounting and dismounting facilities.

Article 410
Safe Work Procedures
1. !t is prohibited to stand or work on the raise climber's top deck, unless in the work location.
2. The hose reeling motor and its control device shall be tested before the cage is raised.
3. The operator shall always be inside the cage when the cage is wounded up and down.
+. The raise climber shall not be operated when its load exceeds maximum allowable load
5. The raise climber's driving motor voltage shall not exceed 75 volts.
6. During explosives charging by the use of electric detonator, electric current to the raise climber shall be
cut off.

Article 411
Inspection and Testing
1. The main shaft of the raise climber's drive chain shall be tested by a competent person using ultrasonic
testing method to ensure that the main shaft is in good condition: The inspection shall be conducted:
a. Before the raise climber is put into operation; and
b. Anytime after having major maintenance or at least every +000 work hours.
2. Tools which influences the climber's safe operation shall be pre-operational tested by a competent person
every during its operation, and after every overhaul.
3. Frequency of the raise climber's overhaul shall comply with the manufacture's specification, unless
otherwise determined by a competent person, but shall not exceed the manufacturer's specification.
+. The raise climber and its rail shall be inspected and cleaned at least once in a week
5. The raise climber's brake and control levers shall be tested at the beginning of every shift.
6. Raise climber's log book, which contains the followings, shall be kept:
a. Date of inspection referred to in paragraph (1);
b. Findings of the inspection referred to in letter (a);
c. Notes on repair and modification signed by the repairman; and
d. The notes on referred to in letter (c) shall also be signed by the supervisor in-charge.

Section Thirteen
Underground Mine Electricity

Article 412
General Application
!n addition to the provision referred to in article 180 to 205, the following provisions shall be applied to
underground electricity consumption.



Article 413
Permanent Electric Cable and Conductor
1. !n addition to the provisions referred to in article 18+, the cables used in the fixed electrical plant at
underground shall be of an armored cable type.
2. The cables installed at each shaft, inclined drift or a road steeper than 100 gradient shall be supported
and fenced to prevent the cables from stretching due to its own gravity.
3. The cables in haulage road shall be installed in a proper position to avoid any damage due to the passing
vehicle or equipment.
+. The conductor referred to in paragraph (1) shall be:
d. !nsulated;
e. Efficiently protected from any mechanical damage and supported at certain intervals; and
f. Cable's metal conduit shall be electrically connected and, where necessary it shall be prevented from
rust, unless the outer earth conductor is of concentric cable, and the metal conduit is used as the
earthling conductor.
5. !f the DC system uses a less than 650 volts, the separate cables having metal conduit cables shall be tied
to each other at an interval of not more than 30 meters.
6. The provisions hereof shall not be applicable to aerial of not trolley cable of the trolley cable.

Article 414
Flexible Cables
1. The cables of underground portable electric equipment shall be lead or other metal conduit flexible cable
or armored cable.
2. Netal conduit, which protects the flexible cable from any damage, shall not be used as earthling
conductor, although it has been connected with other cables or equipment, unless the cables comply with
the specification determined by the Chief Nine !nspector.
3. The connection between the flexible cable and electric equipment or machine shall be well connected,
fully enclosed, and earthed effectively.
+. !f the flexible cable is connected to a permanent cable, the connection shall use a suitable and well-
enclosed plug, provided with a switch, and earthed effectively.
5. Netal conduit of the trailing cable shall be:
a. A flexible and galvanized steel wire
b. Flexible metal sheaves which protects the wire core; and
c. Combination of letters (a) and (b).

Article 415
Insulation Switch
1. The insulation referred to in article 188 paragraph (1) letter (c), which is installed at the underground
electric motor, shall constitute an integral part of the motor or engine, and shall be such placed for easy
operation.
2. The switch connected to the engine via trailing cable shall be designed to prevent automatic starting.

Article 416
High Voltage Limit
1. Electricity of more than 1200 volts shall not be used for:
a. Potable electric equipment; or
b. Electric motor of less than 15 kw


Article 417
Equipment Placement
1. !f deemed necessary, underground transformer or switches shall be placed in a dry and rigidly
constructed room, compartment, or box
2. The room referred to in paragraph (1) shall not be constructed from flammable material, unless the
installation is protected or performed in such a way that it reduces fire risk.
3. !t is prohibited to store flammable materials or explosives in any electric equipment room compartment
or box, or at underground around the electric equipment area.
+. Oil filled transformer with capacity of over 20 kilo volt ampere, which is used at underground, shall be
placed at a fire resistant room and provided with oil leakage sump.
5. All part of electrical equipment which require attention and all electrical equipment's control levers shall
be placed in a room provided with safe entrance and sufficient work space, and all levers shall be
obstacle - free and easily operated.

Article 41S
Equipment Protection
1. Nine workers who perform a job liable to result in damage on the electrical equipment, or where the
equipment will become the sources of any hazard, shall take necessary measures to protect the
equipment from any damage.
2. All electric equipment, except signal equipment and telephone cable in the blast area, shall be secured
during blasting. No electric power shall be reconnected before the equipment is completely inspected and
declared in good condition.

Article 419
Earthling System
1. The earthling shall be made on the mine surface, except there is any alternative available, so that no
current leakage will causes a hazard to:
a. Every metal conduit;
b. Concentric cable's outer conductor;
c. All metal electric parts; and
d. Every electric equipment's lever.
2. Other than the provision referred to in paragraph (1), every earthling conductor shall have an overall
conductivity (including its connection) of not less than a half capacity of the largest conductor, whose
cross section not less than 1+ square mm, except equipment with maximum voltage of 125 volts
connected to any portable equipment, therefore it is not necessary to use earthling conductor of larger
than 6 mm cross section.
3. !n addition to the provision referred to in paragraph (1) and article +1+, the metal conduit can be used as
earthling conductor.
+. !t is prohibited to install any switches, circuit breakers of fuses at the earthling conductor.
5. The underground electric equipment, according to this provision, shall be earthed, therefore neutral-
voltage point or polarity of underground electrical system shall be interconnected at the same place to
the earthling system, and the earthling system and place shall be on the mine surface.
6. This article shall not be applicable to:
a. Any portable lamps, which are protected with fire resistant and earth able insulation, or made of
insulating materials:
b. All double insulating hand tools;
c. All portable equipment with voltage of not more than 50 volts DC or 30 volts AC; and
d. All equipment with maximum voltage 250 volts DC or 125 volts AC, except for portable equipment.
7. !n order to complete the provision referred to in paragraph (1) against free earthling". Use a special
equipotent point shall be made, and all conductive parts of the open equipment shall be connected with
equipotent point of sufficient conductivity.
Article 420
Insulation
1. Naterials of underground electrical equipment insulators shall comply with the required insulation and
mechanical strength, and be resistant against temperature and humidity, and posses other features
which can protect the insulation.
2. Except for concentric system shall always be sufficiently insulated from the ground, providing that:
a. For a poly-phase supply electric system, its neutral point shall be earthed on the surface; or
b. For a system which receives electricity from a transformer, equipped with an automatic tripper in
case of any insulation damage between the primary and secondary winding and one place on the
mine surface;
c. Single-phase supply electric system which receives electricity from the transformer's secondary
winding, other than the system whose center-voltage is earthed, shall be used as the only electricity
source for one or more of the following equipment:
1. Switch's electric control (including automatic control, remote control and local control);
2. Electric connector of the control switch; and
3. !ndicator and other switch's accessories, including the installed lamp.
+. Every electrical system shall be provided with a device which can indicated any system's
malfunction.

Article 421
Electric Joint and Connections
1. All switch parts and electric connections shall possess sufficient mechanical strength and conductivity to
prevent any damage in case of severe usage.
2. All electric parts, such as switches and electrical connections shall be closed in such as a way or protected
that they can prevent any contact hazard, and they shall be protected against any dust or other
substances sediment, or protected from water.
3. !f the switches or electric connections are located at places liable to create fire hazard due to nay gas,
coal dust or other substances, all electric parts shall be protected to protect there outside part against
fire.
+. Every materials insulating conductor within the cable shall be tightly and efficiently enclosed at
connection points with other equipment, where the insulation characteristics may reduce due to humidity
or dryness.
5. Every cable protected by metal layers connected to other equipment, the metal layers shall be securely
and safely attached to ensure sufficient mechanical strength and electric connection.
6. Cable gland, coupler, plug, socked, cable entries for junction box, and box cover shall be constructed in
such away that it prevents any hazard. Cable terminal and its layers shall be safe, safe, and electric
current continuity between connections and conductors shall be well maintained and, when necessary,
covered to prevent any water vapor or other pollutants from entering.
7. !f an interlock circuit is done through plug and socket, they shall be such constructed to avoid the
potential current hazard when the circuit is plugged in or unplugged.
8. To avoid accidental detachment of the plug, the socket shall be of fattener or bolted type.

Article 422
Protection Against Over current and Current Leakage
1. For underground mine equipment, the protections referred to in article 187 shall ensure that:
a. The protection shall operate in the shortest possible time and its current size shall comply with the
equipment need.
b. The current breaker shall be able to cut the system in case of short circuit;
c. Whenever possible, the equipment shall posses any certain short-circuit rate which has been tested
by personnel capable and authorized to perform short-circuit test.
d. !f the part of the system is used for frequent stop and start, it shall be protected against over
current.
2. !t is prohibited, except by a technical supervisor, to adjust or alter working current of a safety device
3. For electrical system liable to high risk against fire, collision, gas and flammable material combustion,
maximum allowable leakage for short circuit rate shall be established.

Article 423
Transformer and Oil Transformer
1. Every transformer shall be provided with sufficient provisions to prevent any hazard caused by low and
high voltages connection. !f the high voltage system is grounded or otherwise, the low voltage shall also
be grounded to ensure that in case of any malfunction in low and high voltage system, thaw electric will
be automatically cut-off
2. !t is prohibited to use flammable oil to cool down, insulate or suppress sparks in transformer or
underground electric equipment.

Article 424
Telephone and Signaling Devices
1. Sufficient measures shall be taken to prevent the telephone cable or cable signal conductor from
contacting cables or other electrical equipment.
2. Any circuit used to give signals underground shall not exceed 25 volts.
3. Every underground telephone shall be:
a. Placed in water-proof container;
b. !nstalled on insulated supports;
c. Provided with conspicuous phone sign and number, including emergency contact number; and
d. Provided with a conspicuous sign indicating its location.
+. At every coal mine, or other locations at fiery mines:
a. !t is prohibited to install telephone or signaling devices unless of the types authorized by the Chief
Nine !nspector.
b. The authorization referred to in paragraph (a) shall cover all circuits and power supply of the system;
and
c. !t is prohibited to connect telephone or signaling devices on the surface, or anywhere within the
mine, to a network used for particular equipment, unless the connection complies with the provisions
referred to in paragraph (a) or connected by eligible coupler unit.
5. Switching devices used at the telephone or construction signals shall be able to prevent any unintended
circuit closing.

Article 425
Electric Welding
1. The provisions referred to in article +13 paragraph (+), article +1+ paragraph (1), article +19, paragraphs
(1) and (2), and articles +20, +21, and +22 shall not be applicable to underground electric welding plant.
2. Permanent electric welding and machines or transformer shall be kept in a fire-proof and well-ventilated
room.
3. The drive engine of outer welding generator shall always be kept clean, free from oil or grease and
flammable materials.
+. Transformer, which is used, for electrical welding shall be disconnected from the power source when not
in use.
5. During an underground welding:
a. !nsulated weld handle equipped with a deed man switch for electric control shall be used.
b. The weld materials shall be earthed or connected to the negative pole of the welding machine or
transformer.
c. The welder or his assistant shall wear safety goggles, apron, and other suitable protectors.
d. !f other workers are working at the welding area, the welding location shall also b provided with weld
curtain.
6. Transformer, rectifier and weld generator, which are used for electrical welding connected to the mine
electrical system, shall be provided with sufficient capacity fuse.
7. Weld generator set shall be provided with fuse
8. Electric welding system shall be provided with an over current breaker connected to the welding plant, or
with fuse of maximum 200 of the welding plant's capacity.
9. The couplings of grounding cable and earthling cable shall use a screw-down connection, instead of a clip
10. Electric welding machine shall be provided with durable plate containing the following information:
a. Nanufacturer, number, and type;
b. Frequency;
c. Number of phase;
d. Primary voltage;
e. Primary resistance;
f. Naximum exposed voltage;
g. Current voltage and secondary voltage; and
h. Load level and operation hours.
11. !f welding is performed in the shaft or near the shaft surface, safety precautions against weld spatters
shall be taken as close as possible to the spatter source.
12. !t is prohibited to use electric welding in an underground coalmine or at a mine section containing
flammable gas, unless a permit has been obtained from the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 426
Placement, charging, and Removal of Traction Battery and other Types of Battery
1. Placement, charging and removal of traction battery shall comply with the provisions referred to in article
389 regarding underground transportation, and its construction shall comply with !mplementation
Guidelines for Work plan and Construction of Equipment used in underground mine.
2. The provisions referred to in paragraph (1) shall only be applicable to traction-type battery. !t is
prohibited to remove or take a battery from its operational location for recharging except to a workshop
or charging station determined by Kepala Teknik Tambang.

Article 427
Equipment Used in a Fiery Work Location
1. !t is prohibited to used electric equipment that of fireproof type, in the work area where flammable gas is
likely to occur.
2. The location of mine referred to in paragraph (1) shall be marked on the map. The establishment of gas-
hazard area shall not only be based on normal operation condition, but also special conditions such as
emission, gas inrush, failed ventilation and other extra ordinary events.
3. !t is prohibited to install electric equipment at gas-hazard location as referred to in paragraph (2), before
the Kepala Teknik Tambang send the ventilation map, and any related matters referred to in article 19,
paragraph (3) letter (c), as well as a detailed list of equipment to be installed. !f the Chief Nine !nspector
has no objection within 30 days, the installation can be performed.
+. Electric lamps used for a fiery mine shall be of fire-proof type
5. Nine !nspector can request Kepala Teknik Tambang for changing, or adding the location as referred to in
paragraph (2) hereof, based on the performed inspection
6. The provisions referred to in paragraph (1) shall also be applicable to permanent or temporary
monitoring, testing, recording and measuring devices.


Article 42S
Power Cut-Off Upon Detection of Flammable Gas
1. !f a personnel finds a flammable concentration of more than 1 at the general body of air an
underground section, or gas presence is indicated by the flame of safety lamp and the provisions as
referred to in article 301 and 302, he shall:
a. !mmediately cut off electricity from all electrical equipment, except telephone lines and signals of gas
detector or electric safety lamp; or
b. Report the case to the Operational Supervisor or personnel competent on electricity.
2. The operational supervisor or the competent person who received the report on the flammable gas shall
immediately take the actions as referred to in paragraph (1) letter (a)
3. After the electricity is cut off from the electrical equipment referred to in paragraph (1) and (2), restarting
shall be done based on the instruction of Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah, and a statement mentioning
that the flammable gas concentration in the general body of air does not exceed 1 any longer.
+. Every electric cut-off and restarting shall be recorded in the Nine Book mentioning location, time and the
length of electric cut off and interruption.

Article 429
Flammable Gas Detector and Measuring Device
!t is prohibited to install or use electric equipment to detect or measure flammable gas unless the Chief Nine
!nspector approves the equipment.

Section Fourteen
Lighting Lamps

Article 430
Application
!n addition to those referred to in articles 98 to 101, the following provisions shall also be applicable to all
underground mines.

Article 431
Lighting on the Workface
1. !n case that the work takes place at night, the pedestrian path, stairways, electric panels, loading and
dumping areas, and buildings shall be provided with sufficient lighting.
2. A workplace illuminated by electric lighting shall be provided with emergency lighting which:
a. Automatically comes on when the electric current is cut off;
b. Possesses its own power sources;
c. Can provide sufficient illumination for evacuating from the building, and for safely continuing the
urgent works; and
d. Shall be tested as frequent as possible, but the testing shall not be less than the manufacturer's
recommendation.

Article 432
Underground Lighting
1. !n an underground mine, effective illuminating lamps shall be installed at the following points:
a. At all entrance into end exits from the shaft, all active stations at the shaft, rider stops, loading
points, and other working and access spaces;
b. At every working or transfer point where engines, motors or machinery are installed;
c. At any places where trailing and detachment of vehicle or transportation system regularly performed;
and at every mechanical loading points.
d. At any places where equipment or operation can result in a hazard due to insufficient lighting.
2. Nine lighting which used electricity referred to in this article shall comply with the articles +12 to +29 its
voltage shall not exceed 250 volts.
3. Available illuminating lamps shall be installed properly.
+. The following places shall be painted:
a. Every shaft entrance and exit, and exit holes which are used frequently;
b. Every road wall or intersection where connection and detachment of vehicle or transportation system
are performed, and every mechanical loading points.
c. Every engine, motor, transformer, or switch room
5. Any places with a distance of 250 meters from the workplace, opening and blast site can be exempted
from the provisions hereof.

Article 433
Mine Workers Lamps
1. Nine workers who get into the underground mine shall be provided with lamps approved by the Chief
Nine !nspector.
2. Nine workers whose work is related to underground loading shall be provided with electric camp lamp
and suitable safety belt to allow continuous wear
3. Every personnel who received the lamp shall:
a. Check and ensure that the lamp not in complete and in good condition;
b. Reject using a lamp not in compliance with the pre-determined requirements;
c. Use the lamps cautiously;
d. Report any lamp damage to the lamp room personnel, and the said personnel shall record the lamp's
failure; and
e. Return the lamp to the lamp room at the shift end.
+. All lamps shall be numbered and maintained so that they are always in good condition, either by a
competent person or those registered in the Nining Book.
5. Lamp room arrangement shall be as follows:
a. All lamps shall be maintained in special lamp room;
b. All lamps shall cleaned, installed and recharged at a room separated from the fuel storage area;
c. Bringing in torch and naked flame, and smoking shall be prohibited in a lamp room where safety
lamp is being serviced;
d. The prohibition sign referred to in paragraphs (b) and (c) shall be installed at the lamp room's
entrance; and
e. The lamp room shall be provided with suitable type and volume of fire extinguisher.
6. The personnel in charge of the lamp room shall be responsible to note:
a. The name of every person entering the mine; and
b. The number of lamps given to the personnel entering the mine.

Article 434
Fire Prevention
1. Relighting the flame safety lamp shall follow the pre-determined procedures.
2. !f naked flame is used:
a. The naked flame lamp shall be closed and provided with a chimney;
b. !t is prohibited to leave naked flame unattended with a personnel;
c. !t is prohibited to place an open flame in contact with wood, and combustible and flammable
materials
3. Smoking or inciting fire shall be prohibited at areas where naked flame shall not be used.
+. !t is prohibited to dispose waste carbide of acetylene lamp in the mine.


Section Fifteen
Underground Fire Prevention And Safety Procedures

Article 435
General Application
!n addition to the provisions referred to in articles 102 to 123, the following provisions shall also be applicable
to all underground mines.

Article 436
The Use of Fire Underground
1. !t is prohibited it lit a fire underground, except for welding, and the weld flame shall be turned off before
leaving the place.
2. The provision referred to in article 167 shall be applicable for the use of oxygen equipment and gas
underground.
3. !t is prohibited to produce acetylene gas underground. Acetylene or other flammable gasses shall be
stored properly in the cylinder.

Article 437
Obligation to Inspect Identify Fire Source
Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall ensure that the fire source underground is identified and inspected
regularly, and safety precautions shall always be taken to prevent fire.

Article 43S
Underground Storage of Flammable Liquid
1. Flammable liquid, including lubrication oil and grease shall be stored safely in a metal container or tank.
2. The container or storage tank referred to in paragraph (1) shall be placed at area free from any
flammable materials, separated from explosives or explosive agents, fire sources, and other materials
enabling to create heat or spark.
3. Diesel engine shall be transported and stored in accordance with the provisions referred to in article 390.
+. The use of LPG at underground mine shall only be intended for maintenance purpose and stored in a
limited number for immediate use, and the cylinder shall be immediately returned to the surface after
work is completed.

Article 439
Prohibitions to Use Gasoline Underground
!t is prohibited to bring in and or store gasoline (premium or premix) underground.

Article 440
Flammable Material
1. Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall establish guidelines on the safe use, storage, and transportation for
flammable gas underground.
2. All flammable material, except coal in a coal mine, and timber, shall not be stored underground unless:
a. !n a room or container made of non-flammable material
b. !n accordance with the guidelines established by Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah
c. Carbide can only be brought into an underground mine by putting in into a water-proof container or
in a carbide lamp container
3. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that flammable material does not constitute a part of the building
which is:
a. Located in the shaft mouth or exit, or
b. An underground place, which constitutes engine room or electrical equipment room.
+. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that every ventilation curtain is made of fire - resistant material and
properly maintained.

Article 441
Mine Surrounding Areas
1. Building on the surface within a distance of 30 meters from a mine opening used as intake airways or
emergency exit shall be:
a. Nade of fire-proof materials; or
b. Nade of material having at least 1-hour fire resistance; or
c. Provided with automatic fire extinguisher.
2. Flammable material or liquid shall not be stored in a distance of 30 meters from a mine opening unless
they are highly needed for maintenance work and are stored in a temporary magazine for any day
consumption.

Article 442
Mine Entrance Facilities
1. Upper part of shaft or entrance shall be constructed from steel other fire proof material. Timber can only
be used after it is previously processed in order to be inflammable.
2. Construction along the shaft shall be fire resistant.
3. Shaft of timber construction shall be fire resistant and provided with a fire extinguisher, and all rider
stops shall be made of fire resistant material.
+. The fire extinguisher referred to in paragraph (3) shall be capable of extinguishing fire form a 20-meter
distance from the shaft at each level.
5. The shaft with less than100 inclination and made of wooden frame shall be fire resistant at least 60
meters from a shaft opening.
6. !t is prohibited to store lubrication oil, grease or flammable liquid at rider stops along the shaft.

Article 443
Obligation to Construct Fire- Resistant Roadway
Roadway support underground road section shall, whenever possible, be constructed from-resistant material.

Article 444
Underground Electric Cable
1. Underground cable shall be installed through a drilled opening and, whenever possible, it shall be
installed at the fire resistant return airways
2. Underground trail cable shall be fire resistant and in compliance with the General Regulation on Electric
Plant (PU!L).

Article 445
Abandoned Electric Circuit
Abandoned or unused electric circuit shall be cut-off and the cut point shall be insulated.

Article 446
Underground Safety Measures
1. Underground station or workplace shall be free from any fuel or flammable waste
2. Before using oxy-acetylene equipment, all dry woods at the surrounding areas shall be wetted.
3. After a burning or welding work, all woods shall be inspected for fire hazard, and reinsertion shall be
performed at each shift, and the result are recorded.
+. Carbide lamps or candles shall not be left burning unattended.
5. Underground area where flammable materials or liquid are subject to ignition shall be provided with no
smoking" sign
6. Following a blasting the surrounding areas shall be inspected against potential fire hazard.

Article 447
Provisions of Fire Fighters Facilities and Appointment
1. The mine shall be provided with fire extinguishers which are suitable sufficient in quantity ready for use.
2. Fire extinguishers which are liable to create toxic gas shall not be used for the underground mine
3. A number of competent personnel shall be determined in writing to periodically inspect the facilities and
equipment referred to in paragraph (1), and reports its result to the Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah.
+. As for fire extinguishing, the Kepala Teknik Tambang shall:
a. Appointed fire fighters
b. Establish fire fighting procedures
c. Train a number competent personnel to operate the facilities and equipment referred to in paragraph
(1) and
d. Perform fire drills regularly or periodically by involving all underground workers

Article 44S
Placement of Fire Extinguishing Facilities
1. !n addition to the provisions referred to in article +3+ paragraph (1):
a. The following facilities and equipment shall be available ready for use in case of any fire outbreaks:
1. Sufficient quantity of water and other fire extinguishing material
2. Sufficient quantity of portable fire extinguisher, suppressing dust, sand or other materials and
3. Water sprinkler, dust diffuser sand or other fire extinguishers.
b. Suitable fire extinguishers shall be available at the following locations:
1. On the upper part of shaft entrance and exit ways
2. !n engine room or electric motor room
3. !n flammable material storage room
+. At every non portable electric motor transformer and switches
5. At every cutting machine or loader used at the workplace and
6. Along the conveyor belt rail and at the following points at coal mine:
a. Certain places at the workface and
b. Some points along the main intake airways and main return airways
2. !f the electric motor is submerged in more than +00 liters of lubrication oil, the area shall be provided
with suitable fire extinguisher.
3. Any underground mine or underground coal mines using prop set shall be provided with pressurized
water to extinguish fire and the water shall be distributed efficiently and sufficiently to every potential fire
hazard area.

Article 449
Water Supply and Distribution
1. !f the water suppressed by water, the water supply shall be sufficient to be distributed through ducting
and hydrant hose to underground potential fire hazard areas.
2. !f the water from the water storage is distributed through vertical shaft or inclined drifts, the dusting's
lowest point shall be provided with sedimentation vessel fitted with drainage valve.
3. Hydrant shall always be available and maintained in ready-for-use condition at he following points:
a. At every shaft station;
b. At a distance of about 20-25 meters from loading and transfer points main intersection, engine room,
fan housing, and station intersection;
c. At an interval of 250 meters from other potentially fire hazard areas; and
d. Near the workface of long wall mining and the central point of room and pillar mining system, and at
mine opening.
+. Fire fighting facilities shall be placed nearby the hydrant as referred to in paragraph (3), and provided
with sufficient hose.

Article 450
Fire Station
The fire station shall be located at the downcast airshaft or tunnel leading to the work area. The following
minimum equipment shall be available at the fire station:
a. Portable fire extinguisher reserves;
b. Sufficient quantity of sand, dust and other fire extinguishing materials;
c. !f the fire is suppressed by water, sand bag reserves shall also be available;
d. 250-meter long hose with coupling device if there is only one water source hydrant;
e. Double branch pipes with nozzle diameter of 12.7 or 16 mm

Article 451
Exemption for Small Scale Mines
Article ++7 to 150 shall not be applicable to the mines employing less than 100 underground mine workers,
unless otherwise determined by the Chief Nine !nspector.

Article 452
Evacuation from Confined Area
Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall ensure that necessary measures have been taken to reduce the workers'
risk of getting trapped in a confined room or place where engines, equipment or combustible materials are
stored or materials emitting noxious gas in a dangerous concentration level are available.

Article 453
Prevention Against fire Outbreak or Potential Fire Outbreak
1. Personnel in charge of mine sections potentially affected by fire outbreak, heat, smoke, gas, vapor or
explosion caused by the fire outbreak shall instruct all personnel in the affected area to evacuated.
2. !f the fire does not indicate immediate hazard in the area, the personnel may still stay at the area to
suppress the fire.
3. Emergency mine evacuation procedures shall comply with the provisions referred to in article 3+1
+. !f the fire has raged, all section of the fire-affected level or layer and all parts of other level or layer
accessible from the exit way shall be treated as referred to in paragraph (1).
5. All underground mine parts shall be treated as referred to in paragraph (1) during the fire fighting
operation and, until the work is complete, no one shall be allowed to enter the underground mine except
for fighting the fire and securing the mine area.
6. !n case of fire outbreak in a coalmine, safety measures shall be taken to secure coal dust at areas
connected with the area.
7. Entrance to the mine shall be prohibited, except for the fire fighting personnel, before the affected areas
are declared secure.
8. After the evacuation, only trained fire fighting personnel, who are wearing respirator and safety
equipment, are allowed to perform personnel evacuation and fire fighting.

Article 454
Plugging Fire or Hazardous Area
Stopping wall to isolate fire or hazardous area shall be constructed rigidly and reported to the Chief Nine
!nspector.

Article 455
Underground Warning System
1. Fire warning sign capable of giving immediate warning for underground workers shall be installed and
maintained in order to be always in good condition.
2. !f workers are assigned to work at the area not reached by the warning system, other warning system
shall be established for their information in case of any fire.

Article 456
Underground Evacuation Drill
1. All mineworkers, upon hearing the fire warning sign, shall be ordered or evacuate through the
predetermined exits and follow the evacuation procedures.
2. Nine workers who are working at several underground locations shall be informed of self-rescue paths
and exits from the workplace to public road.
3. Evacuation drill shall be performed regularly to ensure that all workers are capable of reaching the
surface or predetermined safe places within the time limit set for the available personal self-rescuers.

Article 457
Air Lock and Fire Trap
1. Sufficient number of air locks and fire traps shall be installed underground to disconnect shaft and mine
openings with other work places within the mine to prevent fire, smoke and noxious gas from spreading
in case of fire outbreak.
2. The air lock or firetrap shall be installed at or nearby the shaft station of intake airways and every exit
way functioning as evacuation access or other locations functioning to protect personnel evacuation.
3. The air lock and fire trap shall only be opened and closed based on the instruction of the Kepala
Tambang, and its operation shall comply with the condition and procedures already determined.
+. The air lock and firetrap shall be sturdily and well constructed so that when they are closed, they will not
open due to air pressure variation.
5. The air lock and firetrap shall be able to open from either side by one person and free from any
obstacles.

Article 45S
Personal Self-Rescuers
1. Coal mine or other mines employing diesel or hydraulic driven machine or vehicles, which are liable to
create potential fire shall be provided with self-rescuers to protect the workers from smoke or fire
product hazard.
2. The personal self-rescuers shall be of type acknowledged by the Chief Nine !nspector, and in possession
of sufficient time to rescue to the surface or the available shelter station.
3. Every personnel using the personal self-rescuers shall be previously trained to maintain and use the
equipment in dark condition, and drill shall be performed at least once yearly.
+. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish procedures for issuing, returning, cleaning, and inspecting the
personal self-rescuers.

Article 459
Shelter Station
1. !n the event a person works at a relatively distant location, where the endurance time of the Personal
Self Rescuers isles than the time required evacuating to a safe place, underground shelter station shall be
provided.
2. Shelter station shall be provided with sufficient, clean water and fresh air and communication tools to the
surface, separated from other workplace and closed to prevent any gas from entering the shelter station.
3. The shelter station shall be easily accessible and the rescuing access shall be free from any obstacles and
posted with conspicuous and fluorescent signals.
+. Shelter station and its facilities shall be constructed from fire proof material and:
a. Constructed with a volume of 2 meter per person, and floor section of at least 0,6 square meter per
person;
b. Pressurized air shall be circulated from a fresh source via the intake airways of at least 20 1fm per
person. The air pressure shall be regulated and maintained in normal condition when the shelter
station is in operation; and
c. Additional provisions shall cover:
1. Emergency provisions shall cover;
2. Potable water supply
3. First aid kit;
+. Toilet
5. Whistle;
6. Seat; and
7. Lighting
5. The location of shelter station shall be at the predetermined mine evacuation section, and clearly marked
on the ventilation map as referred to in article 17 paragraphs (d) and (f)

Article 460
Personal Self-Rescuers
1. The following personal self rescuer shall be well maintained and ready-for-use, and placed at easily
accessible locations in an underground mine:
a. Breathing helmet or similar equipment with an air hose of least +0 meters or other short endurance
apparatus, which are suitable for rescuing from non-reparable air.
b. A set of reviving apparatus with 600 liters-capacity oxygen inadequacy, toxic gas, and flammable gas.
2. At an underground mine, there shall be a sufficient number of trained personnel to use the apparatus or
equipment referred to in paragraph (1) at each shift.

Article 461
Mine Rescue
1. Every underground mine employing more than 100 workers shall provide mine rescue in case of
emergency jeopardizing the workers' life and mine security.
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be responsible for arranging and maintaining the rescue of a single or
group of mines operating at an area which can be reached by two hour travel from the rescue facility to
each mine.
3. Every rescue facility which serves one mine or more than one adjacent mines shall be arranged and
operated in accordance with the code of practice of Rescue Arrangement, and approved by the Chief
Nine !nspector.
+. Company regulation on Practice for Rescue Arrangement can be different for each mine or location, by
paying into account the mine location and haulage condition.
5. For the difference of mine rescue referred to in paragraph (+), the Kepala Teknik Tambang can forward
an application to the Chief Nine !nspector along with necessary detailed regulation.
6. Company regulation on the Practice for Rescue Arrangement which has been approved by the Kepala
Teknik Tambang shall be available for all or parts of the following regulation, depending on the relevant
mine condition:
a. Organization and personnel at the rescue station, including permanent rescuers.
b. Rescuers and mine rescue team;
c. Training and qualification of the rescue team;
d. A tool to call rescuers;
e. Transportation arrangement for rescue operation;
f. Notes at the central rescue station;
g. Central rescue station's equipment;
h. Nine rescue equipment;
i. Reviving apparatus accessories
j. Rescue equipment maintenance and inspection;
k. Safe rescue and fire fighting procedures;
l. Signals and communication in a rescue operation;
m. Nine accommodation of the rescue workers; and
n. Schedule of drill and integrated practice at several mines.

Section Sixteen
Welfare
Article 462
Working Alone
!t is prohibited to assign a single to work alone at a remote and hazardous workplace, unless the worker is
provided with a direct communication tool with the surrounding workers.

Article 463
Underground Working Hours
1. !t is prohibited to assign workers to work more than the time determined by the Nanpower Department
and within 2+ hours period, the workers shall only be assigned to work for:
a. 8 hours, excluding the shift transfer, for housemen and signalman.
b. 9 hours including shift transfer and report time for the operational and technical supervisors; and
c. 8.5 hours for other workers.
2. The working hours referred to in paragraph (1) shall be calculated from the worker's entering to the
leaving the mine, or from lowering into to raising from the shaft, and the workers shall be, whenever
possible, hoisted up and down on time.
3. The working hours referred to in paragraph (1) shall not be applicable to the following works:
a. Sampling, investigation, and measurement;
b. Rescuing work in case of emergency and
c. Najor maintenance for the mine security and safety, and production sustainability.
+. !n the event referred to in paragraph (3) letter (c), the Workers can be allowed to get additional 2 hours
overtime, 3 times within 7 days, or 8 consecutive hours once in 7 days. There shall be at least 7-hour-
resbreak before returning to work. All additional working hours referred to hereof shall be recorded in the
overtime logbook.
5. !n case of a very high humidity in a work place, the working hours shall be reduced in accordance with
the local condition.
6. The exception referred to in paragraph (+) against anything regulated in paragraph (3) letter (c) shall not
be applicable in case of extreme heat and humidity.

Article 464
First Aids
1. First Aids room, which is provided with drug. First aids kits, stretchers and blankets shall be available at
easily accessible place at underground mine.
2. Shift supervisor and some of his subordinates shall obtain training on first aids.
3. Every underground mine supervisor who has attended first aids course shall be provided with first aids
for immediate use when need, and:
a. Every first aid kit shall be labeled and contain drugs and a minimum of the following:
1. Two piece of large bandages,
2. Two pieces of small bandages; and
3. Six pieces of suitable plaster.
b. Every supervisor provided with first aids kit as referred to in paragraph (a) shall return it at the end
of his shift to a place determined by the Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah.
c. The Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall arrange that every first aids kit returned is inspected by a
competent personnel and, when necessary, complete its contents before being reused

Article 465
First Aids Point
1. The mine shall be provided with diagrams indicating the location of First Aids point within the mine; and:
a. The first aids point shall be at locations suitable for access to:
1. Every workplace or area of personnel authority;
2. Every roadway frequented by the workers; and
3. The bottom of every shaft or inclined drift.
b. The original diagram or its copy shall be kept in the mine office
2 The first aids point shall be provided with:
a. Stretchers and blankets, which are suitable and sufficiently protected from polluted air and dust;
b. A number of splints:
c. A first Aids-signed kit which contains a number of bandages which are suitable with the splints; and
d. Two small bags containing clean sand or other similar function material, to be used as a retainer in
case of neck or head injury.
3. For easy access to the First Aids point:
a. !t shall be sign-posted; and
b. The first aids point shall be indicated at the mine sketch referred to in article 37 paragraph (2).

Article 466
Casualty Transporter
1. Underground mine shall be provided with wheeled chair, suitable with underground mine condition, to
transport the casualty in case that stretcher cannot transport the casualty.
2. At every shaft, inclined drift, or exit way which can not be passed by walking and every workface at the
mine with inclination of more than 2:5 or more shall be provided with an equipment to transport the
casualty safely.
3. !n the absence of sufficient hospital facility, the mine employer shall establish a provision to ensure that:
a. The ambulances (car, boat, air plane or other vehicles) shall be available when needed to transport
and injured or sick worker to the hospital and hisfher home.
b. Personnel in charge of attending the ambulance shall always be available at the mine.

Article 467
House Keeping
1. Work place, traffic road, warehouse and service room shall always be kept clean and tidy.
2. Work place floor shall always be maintained in dry condition.
3. Floor, work place and roadway shall always be free from any protruding nails, debris, holes, or loose
pieces of woods.


Article 46S
Personal Protective Equipment
1. very personnel shall wear safety helmet when being in an underground mine or within or around the
mine or factory having potentially falling materials and getting struck hazard.
2. Every personnel shall wear safety boot in an underground mine, within or at the surrounding or a mine or
factory having any potential feet injury.
3. Every personnel shall wear safety glasses, or goggles, or face shield or other suitable protectors when he
fshe is inside or surrounding of a mine or factory enabling to cause eye injury.
+. Every personnel working at an altitude of more than 2.5 meters and possibly subject to any falling hazard
shall wear safety belt or harness.

Article 469
Garbage Bin
The garbage bin shall be capped and provided at certain locations, and it shall at certain interval, be emptied
and cleaned.

Article 470
Communication Means
Telephone or two-way communication means shall be provided with use instruction and important contact
number. The telephone or two-way communication means shall serve surface communication from:
a. Shaft bottom or exits;
b. Underground terminal or personnel transportation system; and
c. Work location or operational supervisor.

Article 471
Animal-Whim Transportation
1. Along animal-drawn transportation road, shelter holes that are sufficiently wide for two persons shall be
provided at every interval of not more than +0 meters.
2. At the road not provided with permanent lighting, every animal-whim of the miner lorry shall carry
suitable lamps, and the last lorry shall be provided with red tail lamp.
3. !t is prohibited to ride the animal within the mine.
+. No animal shall be left unattended in the mine, except it has been released from the drawn vehicle, and
shall be tethered.

Article 472
Respirator Apparatus
1. The Chief Nine !nspector shall approve the types of respiratory apparatus used.
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall make company regulation regarding the respiratory apparatus handling,
application, storage and maintenance in accordance with the manufacturer's specification and the
application condition.
3. Application of the approved respiratory apparatus shall comply with following respiratory hazards:
a. Oxygen inadequacy;
b. Gases or smoke; and
c. Other applications such as dust and toxic fumes, and application length and interval.



Section Seventeen
Manpower Training and Supervision

Article 474
General Application
!n addition to the provisions referred to in article 28-30 herein, the following provisions shall also be
applicable to all underground mines.

Article 474
Manpower Training
1. Underground mine shall not employ a worker who has never worked at an underground mine, unless he
has attended training and obtained permit from the Kepala Teknik Tambang: and
a. The company shall certify a worker who has attended training or instruction approved by the Chief
Nine !nspector.
2. The training referred to in paragraph (1) shall be in compliance with the curriculum approved by the
Chief Nine !nspector; and if it is determined otherwise, the curriculum shall:
a. Run at least 30 days; and
b. Whenever possible, comply with the real underground mine condition, and the training shall be
conducted at least 6 days in the mine.
3. very curriculum referred to in paragraph (1) shall mention in detail the, classroom theory, practice,
training place and schedule, accommodation facilities and equipment which must be provided as well as
arrangement related to both classroom theory and practice training.

Article 475
Supervision of Underground Mine Workers
1. A person who has completed training and is employed at underground mine shall be supervised by an
instructor or supervisor during his first 30 days of assignment.
2. The supervision referred to in paragraph (1) shall only be performed for one person at any time, except a
number of workers are working at one place simultaneously.
3. !t is prohibited to work at a place specially intended for training purposes except for a trainee, instructor,
supervisor, mine officer or authorized person.
+. The trainee shall only be at underground when accompanied by an instructor or training supervisor.
5. The training shall only be performed after the Kepala Teknik Tambang or the Chief training department
has appointed an instructor or training supervisor, trainees and the materials to be presented.

Article 476
Training on New Task
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that no one is assigned to perform a new task which hefshe never been
done; unless the worker:
a. Has performed underground work, other than the new work for at least 6 months after completing the
training as referred to in article +75.
b. Has attended training and received a certificate as referred to in article +7+ paragraph (1), letter (b)
c. The training referred to in paragraph (1) hereof shall not be necessary for a trained worker and the
worker who has performed safe working procedures for the new task for 12 months before the new task
is assigned to him.

Article 477
Exemption
1. Article +7+ and +75 shall not be applicable to the following persons:
a. Operational supervisor;
b. Nachining or electric crew;
c. Nine surveyor or a person whose special duty is surveying;
d. Personnel whose main duty is performing monitoring and measurement or sometime involved in
monitoring and measurement works; and
e. Personnel usually not working underground.
2. Article +7+ shall not be applicable to a worker whose main work is shaft sinking or tunnel excavation, and
the worker has attended training for at least 6 days with 30 hours exercise. The training shall consist of
field practice and discussion on matters related to the work.
3. Article +7+ shall not be applicable to those having at least two-year underground mine work experience,
either in !ndonesia or abroad, and Kepala Teknik Tambang deems them sufficiently competent in Bahasa
!ndonesia.
+. Article +76 shall not be applicable to personnel referred to in paragraphs (2) and (3)
5. Article +7+ shall not be applicable to students who are on-the-job training:
a. They have at least 7 day-training, consisting of safe working procedures, underground safe riding
procedures practical exercise and demonstration and discussion the work related meter and
b. During the firs 1+ days on the job training the students shall be supervised by an instructor or
operational supervisor

Article 47S
Training Record
Copy of each certificate issued based on this regulation shall be kept in the mine office during the holder
employment until 6 months after hisfher unemployment.

Article 479
Annual Refreshing Course
Every underground workers shall attend an annual refreshing course for at least 2+ hours in accordance with
the curriculum approved by the Chief Nine !nspector or Kepala Teknik Tambang. !f the training is conducted
in stages, the duration of each stage shall not be less than 30 minute and the workers shall be informed that
the stage is a part of the annual refreshing course.

Article 4S0
Appointment and Duties of Instructor
1. A number of inspectors shall be appointed to supervise underground mine training, and the Kepala
Teknik Tambang shall immediately report the said appointment to the Chief Nine !nspector.
2. !t is prohibited to give additional tasks, other than the training task, to the underground instructor.
3. !f the instructor does not have any tasks for one consecutive week, the Kepala Teknik Tambang shall
arrange training a schedule during the said tome. A copy of the said notification shall be kept in the mine
office where the personnel perform hisfher duty.
+. The duties of every instructor are to:
a. Supervise the training progress.
b. Nake records on the training implementation and prepare a report on the progress of the trainees
under supervision of Kepala Teknik Tambang. The report shall be made within the given time, and
weekly report shall made in case that no given time was arranged.
c. Prepare weekly report on the progress and supervision of the trainees under supervision of Kepala
Teknik Tambang.
d. Nake a recommendation to the Kepala Teknik Tambang regarding future training
e. Prepare quarterly report to Kepala Teknik Tambang regarding the progress of each underground
mine personnel experiencing in other underground mine for less than 12 months.
f. Pay attention to welfare of workers whose underground mine experience is less than 6 months.
5. The record and report referred to in paragraph (+) shall be kept for 12 months in the mine office.

Article 4S1
Compensation During the Training
1. Training shall be performed during the normal working hours, and the personnel attending the trainee
shall be paid the same amount as they receive in normal working hours.
2. !f the training is performed out of the working hours, the trainee shall receive compensation in lieu such
as transport meal and accommodation allowance during the training.

Article 4S2
Exemption
The mine !nspector can give written exemption in the Nining Book regarding the application of the provision
herein at each mine or section of mine, or the personnel working therein, if the Nine !nspector can ensure
that the exemption will not reduce occupational health and safety of the trainees or the mine.

Section Eighteen
Protection Against Natural Radiation
Article 4S3
Application
The following provision shall only be applicable as protective measures against natural radiation hazard
coming from the mine rocks or air.
Provisions on the protection against natural radiation hazard shall comply with the regulation established by
the National Atomic Energy Board or other related instructions.

Article 4S4
Assessment
1. Assessment of radon derivatives within the mine shall be performed by transuding sample from every
main return airway, at a point nearby intersection with the shaft or inclined drift or portal.
2. The required samples referred to in paragraph (1) shall be taken by using the method and equipment
designed to measured radon derivative concentration or the quantity of alpha radiation energy, and the
method and equipment shall be approved by the Chief Nine !nspector. A competent person appointed by
the Kepala Teknik Tambang shall take samples retraction.
3. !f the sample retraction indicates the presence of radon derivatives concentration of alpha energy which
is equivalent with:
a. Or more than 0.03 work level:
1. Radon concentration measurement shall perform at work location, roadways and places where
the workers gather. Samples retraction shall be performed parallel with the workers nose when
working.
2. !f the result of measurement referred to in sub point (1) is between 0.1-0. 03 Work Level, the
following measurements shall be performed at interval not more than 3 month until the
measurement indicate 0.1 work level.
3. !f the result of measurement more than 0.1 work level, the next measurement shall be
performed every week until the measurement indicate less than 0.1 Work Level.
b. !f the measurement result indicates less than 0.03 Work Level, the next measurement shall be
performed every 12 months.
+. At uranium mining, the interval referred to in paragraph (3) letter (a) point (2) shall be reduced to one
month and paragraph (3) letter (a) point (3) to everyday, and paragraph (3) letter (b) to 3 months.




Article 4S5
Radiation Limit
1. The Nine Company, Kepala Teknik Tambang and Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall take necessary
measures to limit the mine workers' exposure against natural radiation hazard when working
underground
2. !n addition to the provision referred to in paragraph (1), the mineworkers shall be protected against
radon derivatives, which exceed Nonthly + Work Level in one calendar year.
3. The mineworkers shall be protected against radon derivatives of more than 1.0 Work Level except in
emergency situation.

Article 4S6
Personal Radiation Record
1. !f radon derivative concentration in the mine is detected more than 0.1 Work Level, the personnel
working at the area shall use radiation dosimeter and the personal measurement result shall be recorded.
2. Every personnel in the area referred to in paragraph (1) shall be provided with personal notes containing
name, work location, walking path and average concentration of radon derivatives at each workplace.
The accumulation of the workers' exposure against radiation hazard shall be calculated every week.
3. Once the personal records on exposure initiated, it shall not be stopped until the person is not longer
working or has spent time in an area containing more than 0.1 Work Level for six week, and the
accumulative exposure against the hazard for the calendar year does not exceed 1 monthly work leave.
+. At the latest of two months after the end of calendar year or the mine closure the personal notes on the
exposure against radiation referred to in paragraph (2) and (3) shall be forwarded to the authorized
institution the copy of the notes shall be available in the mine office.
5. The authorized personal record on exposure against hazard shall be handed to the workers or the person
authorized by the workers based on a written request.

Article 4S7
Safety Measures
1. !n addition to the provisions referred to in article +85 paragraph (1) the following safety precaution shall
be performed:
a. !t is prohibited to smoke at all mine areas where personnel notes on exposure as referred to in article
+86 shall be obeyed.
b. Authorized Entry only" sign shall be provided at abandoned mine area where concentration of radon
derivatives exceed 1 work level
c. The approved breathing apparatus for protection against radon derivates shall be available at the
mine and shall be used by all personnel who enters the area containing radon derivatives of more
than 1 work level
d. !t is prohibited to enter an area containing radon derivatives of more than 10 work level unless the
personnel are wearing breathing apparatus or mask capable of absorbing the radon and its gas
2. !nspection of gamma radiation shall be performed at all mine areas containing a number of radioactive
grains. The inspection shall be performed in accordance with the standard approved by the chief mine
inspector and
a. !f the measurement result of average gamma radiation indicate a dose level of more than 7.5 micro
sievers (5.5 U Sv) per hour the radiation dosimeter shall be worn by all personnel exposed to the
radiation and personal record on the exposure hazard and the cumulative of exposure to the gamma
radiation hazard shall be kept.
b. The data referred to in paragraph (a) shall be applicable as the notes referred to in article +86
c. Personal record of exposure against yearly gamma radiation shall not be more than 50 mm sievers
(50 m Sv).


Article 4SS
Radiator Dosimeter
!f personal record on exposure against radiation hazard shall be established for all mine workers as referred
to in article +86 the Kepala Teknik Tambang shall:
a. Perform cooperating with a laboratory or institution processing complete apparatus and experts and is
experienced in operating dosimeter and its dose calculation and
b. Cooperate with an advisor on protection in the mine

Article 4S9
Medical Inspection
Personnel who has been working in the mine for more than 1 year where the dose exceed 30 of the
workers yearly exposure against the pre determined radiation medical inspection shall be available to monitor
person exposed to radiation and its influence.






























CHAPTER IX
UNDERGROUND COAL MINE

Section One
General

Article 490
Application
Every underground coal mine shall be regarded as gas hazard mine and other underground coalmines shall
also be regarded as gas hazard mine if they fulfill one the following provisions:
a. They always contain methane gas (fir damp) of more than 0.25 at any underground mine inspector or
b. Underground fire or methane gas explosion has occurred.

Article 491
Exemption on Gas Hazard Mine
The chief mine inspector can state an underground coal mine as non gas hazardous mine if none of the
conditions referred to in article +90 has never occurred.

Article 492
Safety Lamp
1. Other than the provisions referred to in article +33, it is prohibited to use other lamps in underground
mine unless approved by the chief mine inspector
2. The safety lamp referred to in this article shall be a flame or tightly enclosed and protected electric lamp
to ensure that it will not incite flammable gas and dust outside the lamp.

Article 493
Flame Safety Lamp Requirements
Every flame safety lamp shall comply with the following regulations
1. At gassy mine:
a. Every lamp shall be such made and maintained that when it is used at a mine containing gas or dust
it will not incite the gas and dust outside the lamp
b. The lighter shall be so tested to ensure that when it is used to restart the underground lamp it will
not incite gas and dust outside the lamp
2. Safety lamp constructions:
a. The lamp shall be provided with magnetic lock
b. !f it uses wire mesh the raw material the wire gauze hole size and inner and outer wire uniformity
shall comply with safety requirements and
c. Every lamp shall possess:
i. Simple and reliable device to arrange its wick from the outside
ii. A device to re light the lamp from outside and
iii. A device able to control air inflow only from the lamp's upper part
3. The glasses tube shall fulfill the following requirements:
a. The glass tube shall have a smooth and clear surface its end shall be flat and perpendicular to the
glass axle and
b. The glass shall be durable
+. The bonnet shall comply with the following requirements:
a. The lamp shall be provided with bonnet top provide with wire gauze against direct wind flow and
b. The clearance between the wire gauze upper ends with the bonnet shall be at least 10 mm
5. The lighting intensity of a clean lamp shall be at least the same as 0.6 candelas
6. The lamp shall:
a. Be capable of giving real indication thought its flame on methane gas presence and oxygen
inadequacy within the mine
b. Posses stable flame and
c. Posses sufficient fuel for 12 hours normal flame its fuel shall be of the type approved by the chief
mine inspectors
Article 494
The Use and Maintenance of Flame Safety Lamp
1. Every flame safety lamp shall always be clean in good condition all parts shall be well installed and kept
in ready for use condition
2. !f the flame safety lamp is used to detect methane gas content and oxygen deficiency (O
2
) the detection
shall be performed careful by a competent and well visibility personnel.

Article 495
The following inspection shall be performed prior to and during the use of flame safety lamp:
a. The lamp shall be inspected prior being taken out of the lamp room to ensure that:
1. The lamp is in good condition and taken out of the lamp room to correctly and securely
2. The glass tube shall not be fractured and be in good condition and
3. The glass tube shall not be rusty and dirty and the wire gauze shall not be oily
b. The following prohibitions shall be obeyed
1. !t is prohibited to open the lamp
2. !t is prohibited to lay the lamp on the floor or hang it on the area where it is liable to be hit by other
objects and
3. !t is prohibited to leave a burning lamp unattended
c. When the lamp is damaged it shall be put out immediately

Article 496
Methane Gas Inspection by Using Flame Safety Lamp
!f flame safety lamp is used to test methane gas:
a. The lamp shall be hold securely at its oil fount
b. !f the flame grows due to the gas intrusion into the lamp, the lamp shall be descended slowly and
carefully if the flame goes out it shall be taken the fresh air area and necessary measures shall be taken
to flow sufficient fresh air to the area
c. !f the light intensifies while the wick flame goes off the lamp shall be immediately taken to the fresh air
area and necessary measures shall be taken to flow sufficient fresh air to the area
d. !t is prohibited to keep the lamp emits smoke because it can cover the wire gauze and restrain the air
flow to the lamp and
e. Before entering a work area for inspection purpose the flame shall be inspected very carefully and while
advancing along the tunnel perform frequent inspections to indicate methane gas content.

Article 497
Relighting Flame Safety Lamp Underground
1. No one shall be allowed, except the mine inspector, Kepala Teknik Tambang, Kepala Tambang Bawah
Tanah and a person authorized in writing to bring flame safety lamp which is provided with lighter and
self locking device into a fiery mines
2. !t is prohibited to light a flame safety lamp at underground unless the lamp is proved good by inspection
result
3. !t is prohibited to light a self lighting flame safety lamp shall in area suspected as containing flammable
gas.
+. The personnel allowed bringing self-lighting flame safety lamp is prohibited to bring safety lock unless he
is authorized as referred to in paragraph (1).
5. The lamp referred to in paragraph (+) shall be re-lighted by the operational supervisor

Article 49S
Electric Safety Lamp
1. !t is prohibited to use electric portable lamp at a fiery mine except the types approved by the chief mine
inspector
2. The electric safety lamp shall be provided tightly closed glass cap around the lamp and provided with
sturdy bonnet
3. The mine workers who use portable electric safety lamp shall consider the followings:
a. Battery cap and glass cap protecting the lamp shall only be opened by an authorized personnel in the
lamp room and
b. !f the electric safety lamp is damaged or defect it shall immediately be put out returned and changed
with a good one.

Article 499
Banned Material
1. !t is prohibited to light any kinds of fire in an underground fiery mine and to bring fluent lighter or
matches
2. !n addition to the provision referred to in paragraph (1), it is prohibited to bring mechanical, electrical
and electronics incendiary devices into an underground mine unless of the type approved by the chief
mine inspector
3. Kepala Teknik Tambang or the appointed personnel has the authority to inspect every worker who is
suspect as bringing the material referred to in paragraph (1) and (2) into the underground mine the
names of the appointed personnel shall be recorded in the mine book.
+. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall ensure that all workers entering the underground mine have inspected
against materials referred to in paragraphs (1) and (2).

Section Two
Prevention Against Flammable Gas and Dust Ignition

Article 500
General Duties
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall:
a. !nspect and know the source of underground flammable gas and dust ignition
b. Take effective preventive measures to prevent any ignition

Article 501
Protection Against Methane Gas Ignition
1. !f firedamp is found in a fiery mine, preventive measures shall be taken to prevent any gas ignition and
the measures shall remain taken as long as the hazard exits.
2. !n addition to the provision referred to in article 500, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall establish necessary
preventive measures to reduce the possibility of fire damp ignition caused by:
a. Blasting
b. Electric usage
c. Static electric spatter
d. Nechanical friction
e. Spatter resulted by friction between excavating and hauling equipment
f. Highly combustible coal
g. Naked flame
3. Light metal alloy (aluminum, magnesium, titanium, and its alloy) shall not be, whenever possible, used
underground it is prohibited to use such metals in area where gas accumulation is liable to occur
+. !f self combustion is liable to occur in a mine or part of a mine the workplace shall be divided into
separate workroom as preventive measures seal or tightly enclosed area shall be provided at the
entrance to each workplace section.



Article 502
Gas Methane Inspection
1. Every fiery underground mine shall be provided with at least a number of methane gas detector approved
by the Chief Nine !nspector
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall appoint sufficient number of competent personnel to inspect gas methane
at workplace during the shift by using gas methane detector.
3. The competent personnel referred to in paragraph (2) shall:
a. Have attended gas methane detector operation training whose curriculum approved by the Chief
Nine !nspector
b. Possess at least one year underground coal mine working experience and has been trained at least
one month by a competent person
c. Be registered in the mining book and
d. Be given refreshment training at least once in three year
+. The personnel referred to in paragraph (2) who perform gas methane inspection and not required to
prepare written report shall immediately report methane gas detected to the Operational Superintendent.

Article 503
Methane Gas Inspection Around Electrical Equipment or Diesel Engine
1. At a workplace where electrical equipment or diesel engine is in operation, methane gas testing shall be
performed minutes before the electrical equipment or diesel engine started
2. !f the result of the gas methane inspection indicates more than 1 the electrical equipment or diesel
engine shall not be operated
3. The inspection referred to in paragraph (1) shall be performed by the competent personnel referred to in
article 502 paragraph (3), and it shall be repeated at certain interval during the equipment operation
+. !f during the shift mote than 1 methane gas is detected the following measures shall be taken
a. Electric current cut off and diesel engine shut off and the provisions referred to in article +28 shall be
immediately taken and
b. Air flow shall whenever possible be diverted or adjusted to reduce the methane gas content
5. !f other electric powered or diesel driven locomotives or vehicle are used in a fiery underground mine the
gas methane inspection shall be performed at both road ends and at some points along the road
6. The diesel engine used within the mine shall be provided with exhaust gas cathalic

Article 504
Methane Gas inspection Prior to Destroying Roof Rocks
Shortly before the roof rocks are destroyed methane gas around the natural supported work area shall be
inspected if the inspection indicates 1 by volume or more the roof rocks shall not be destroyed

Article 505
Methane Gas Measurement Location
1. Nethane gas measurement shall at least be performed at the following locations:
a. Any workplace at each excavation location
b. Every advance diverge excavation
c. At return airway junction from the workplace
d. A place of less than 30 cm to the cave in or excavated site at the return airway along natural
supported wall
e. A certain place along the road the road where methane gas accumulation is predicted to occur
f. At gas monitoring pipe installed at tightly closed area
g. At gas monitoring pipe installed at tightly closed area
2. Nethane gas measurement as referred to in paragraph (1) shall be performed at two section namely:
a. As close as practicable possible to the roof rocks and
b. Airway cross section
3. The measurement result shall be recorded in the ventilation daily log book kept at the mine surface

Article 506
Precautions Against Flammable Dust
1. To prevent explosion of coal dust and or other flammable materials from spreading the dust shall be
cleaned and shall not be let accumulated at the work place or on electrical equipment
2. !f an underground mine activity can arise or excessively increase dust content in the air and hence, pose
explosion hazard the resulted dust shall be suppressed by water or other approved methods
3. !f the flammable dust grain and concentration reach dangerous level preventive measures shall be taken
which cover the following
a. Preventing the dust from airborne
b. Reducing dust during excavation and loading
c. Cleaning and disposing dust out off the mine and
d. Spreading a sufficient quantity of lime powder or by other means regularly to ensure that the dust is
inflammable
+. The preventive measures referred to in paragraph (3) shall comply with Guidelines on Precaution against
flammable dust" issued by the chief mine inspector particularly on composition grain size and spreading
methods of lime powder

Article 507
Dust Sampling
1. !n case that the condition referred to in article 506 paragraph (3) exists dust sampling from each dusty
road shall be taken at maximum interval of 30 days to assess the flammable dust content
2. At least one samples of the coal dust sampling referred to in paragraph (1) shall be taken from:
a. At coal haulage road, at maximum interval of 10 meters
b. At return airway starting with a distance of 180 meters from workplace and the next sampling shall
be at interval of not more than 150 meters
c. Every road other than those referred to in letters (a) and (b) with an interval of not more than 250
meters
3. !f the analysis of dust samples taken during six consecutive months indicates that the dust content can
naturally be retained without increasing the flammable dust content, the sampling for analysis can be
taken within an interval of not more than 90 (ninety) days. For a longer sampling interval, an approval
from the mine inspectors registered in the mine book shall be obtained
+. Paragraph (3) shall not be applicable in case of any changes in condition or work method causing an
increase in flammable dust content so that the inflammable dust concentration reduces therefore the dust
sampling and analysis shall be performed at the soonest as possible time.
5. The result of dust analysis shall be recorded in a special book within no longer than 21 days after the
samples are taken the result of dust sample analysis referred to in paragraph (2) shall, in addition to
being recorded in the numerical value, also be plotted in the mine map attached to the special book, and
given different colors indicating its dust concentration level.
6. !f a mine road is supported by arch support, dust samples taken at the roof and wall shall be regarded
one sample
7. Dust samples to be analyzed shall be evenly mixed of smaller than 250 micrometer in size and analyzed
by using the approval method
8. The provisions referred to in article 506 paragraph (3) points and (d) shall be application to:
a. Dust distancing less than 10 meters from the workplace
b. Naturally wet dust and
c. Dust containing less than 10 volatile meters

Article 50S
Non-Flammable Dust
1. The dust samples taken and analyzed as referred to in article 507 shall only be categorized into non
flammable dust if it complies with the following requirements:

volatile
Natter
Contents
Ninimum
Content of non-
Flammable
Naterials
Nore than 25
20 - 25
15 - 20
10 - 15
Less than 20
80
75
70
65
Nil
2. !f the result of dust analysis taken from a road section fails to comply with the requirements referred to
in paragraph (1):
a. The road section shall be speeded with lime powder and
b. Dust sample shall be re taken

Article 509
Precautions Against Coal Dust Transporting Vehicles
vehicles, which are intended to transport fully or mostly coal dust, shall not pass the road where cable and
electric equipment are located, unless the vehicles body is tightly closed

Article 510
Fire Inhibitor
1. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall prepare and emphasize the instillation of fire inhibitor, either water shield
or stone powder shield at the coal haulage road prevent the spread of fire introduced by explosion of
methane gas and coal dust ignition
2. The scheme of fire inhibitor as referred to in paragraph (1) shall be authorized by the chief mine
inspector
3. The scheme referred to in paragraph (1) shall cover the followings:
a. Position and types of the flame shield
b. !ndicate the location of shield placement at the mine map
c. Update the shield condition data at least quarterly and
d. !nspection of shield physical condition and its report
+. The copy of scheme as referred to in paragraph (2) shall be kept in the mine office. !f the mine inspector
is of the opinion that the shield installation and maintenance still need improvement he can instruct to do
so, and it shall be recorded in the mine book
5. The provision hereof shall not be applicable to the road where coal dust's volatile content is les than 10

Article 511
Pre-Shift Inspection
1. Operational supervisor shall have inspected all workplaces one hour prior to the beginning of each shift or
before a worker entrees a workplace in a fiery underground mine. The name(s) of supervisor(s) or the
personnel appointed to perform the inspection shall be registered in the mine book.
2. The inspection and testing at each workplace as referred to in paragraph (1) shall cover:
a. Nethane gas accumulation
b. Oxygen inadequacy
c. Condition of air lock and ventilation door
d. Condition of roof rocks, workplace and wall
e. Condition of road rail and personnel transport conveyor belt
f. Hazard at road leading to abandoned areas
g. Air volume and velocity at road junction
h. Heat signals at coal transport conveyor belt
i. Other hazard requested by this regulation or guidelines
3. !f during the inspection referred to in paragraph (1) the personnel notices any hazardous condition the
area shall be declared a hazardous area and the said personnel shall take necessary measured by
installing conspicuous sign and further reporting it to the kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah
+. !t is prohibited to enter a hazardous area, except for personnel appointed to overcome the situation,
when the hazard sign has not been removed
5. Upon completing the inspection referred to in paragraph (2) the inspection result shall be reported to the
Kepala Teknik Tambang Bawah Tanah
6. The inspection result as referred to in Paragraph (3) shall be recorded in the mine book, which can at any
time be inspected by the mine inspectors.

Article 512
Daily inspection
1. Operational supervisor or the appointed and competent personnel shall perform inspection against
hazardous conditions at each workplace, at least once at each shift or more frequently when necessary,
and the inspection personnel shall be registered in the mine book.
2. Any hazardous condition shall be directly coped with and if it is subject to imminent hazard, Kepala
Teknik Tambang or Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah shall immediately evacuate all personnel, except
those assigned to cope with the condition
3. The inspection referred to in paragraph (1) shall include methane gas and oxygen inadequacy inspections
+. !t is obligated to perform inspection at workplaces at least every four hours.

Article 513
Weekly Inspection
1. !n addition to pre shift and daily inspections referred to in articles 511 and 512, inspection on hazardous
condition including methane gas testing or other matters stimulated herein shall be performed weekly by
the operational supervisor.
2. The workplace referred to in paragraph (1) shall be all workplaces both always and occasionally occupied
by personnel or workers.
3. Any identified hazardous condition shall be immediately reported to the Kepala Tambang Bawah Tanah or
Kepala Teknik Tambang, and the hazard shall be immediately coped with.
+. The result of inspection, testing and actions taken as referred to in paragraph (3) shall be reported in
writing and signed by the inspection personnel. The mine inspector can at anytime, inspect the notes.

Article 514
Inspection Against Unmanned and abandoned Areas
The operational supervisor shall perform inspection against methane gas, oxygen inadequacy and other
hazardous condition no longer than three hours before allowing anyone to enter the abandoned or not being
worked areas.

Article 515
Evacuation in Case of Excessive Methane Gas
1. !n addition to the provision referred to in the ventilation standard of fiery mine, evacuation procedures
regulated in article 3+2 shall be applicable if the measured methane gas content is more than 2 at air
flow cross sections at any places in underground mine.
2. Kepala Teknik Tambang shall immediately report to the chief mine inspector the recovery of the affected
area, evacuation implementation and safety measures and if deemed necessary, the chief mine inspector
shall heed the report and enforce special provisions for the mine

Section Three
Ventilation in Fiery Mine

Article 516
Application
The provisions referred to in articles 369 to 376 and the definition in article (1) paragraph 65-69 shall be
applicable to additional regulation in this article.

Article 517
Ventilation Standard
1. The provisions referred to in article 370 paragraph (2) shall be applicable to fiery mine, unless the
methane gas content is less than 1
2. Nethane gas content at intake airway to every workplace shall not exceed 0.5 measured at a distance
of 50 meters before the workplace

Article 51S
General Provisions
1. !f the ventilation fails to comply with the requirement referred to in articles 369 and 370, the supervisor
shall immediately report it to the Kepala Teknik Tambang and the ventilation personnel shall take
necessary measures to rectify the ventilation condition so as to comply with the prevailing requirements.
2. Each mine section prepared to be mined shall be provided with ventilation map containing the followings.
a. Advancement stage of the auxiliary fan in an advanced diverge and permanent ventilation circuit.
b. !n long wall mining, the completion of ventilation circuit before preparing the workplace for
production commencement and
c. The maximum length of advance diverge to be made prior to excavating ventilation hole at natural
supported mine operation
3. The copy of the ventilation map as referred to in paragraph (2) shall be sent to the chief mine inspector
as referred to in paragraph (19) letter (d)
+. !f closely located mines share the same ventilation system the responsibility for the ventilation system
shall be given to one of the Kepala Teknik Tambang andfor to other personnel appointed to be in charge
of ventilation.
5. !t is prohibited to alter general ventilation system without any order from the Kepala Teknik Tambang,
except in emergency in the alternation shall be performed only by senior operational supervisor and
reported to the chief mine inspector.
6. !f the majority of the ventilation system is altered:
a. ventilation map containing the alternation shall be made
b. !t shall only be performed by the competent personnel and
c. Copy of the plan map of ventilation alternation shall be sent to the chief mine inspector no longer
than 30 days before the alternation commences.


Article 519
Company Regulation on Ventilation Arrangement
1. Company regulation on ventilation and use of ventilation equipment shall be made to ensure that:
a. Naintenance and operation of all ventilation system are safe and effective
b. Fan operation in monitored
c. Nine condition is recovered from accumulation of noxious gas and methane gas exceeding the
threshold stipulated herein.
d. Ninimum amount of air circulated to each workplace and
e. The use of auxiliary fan is arranged and recorded
2. A number of competent personnel shall be appointed to monitor the implementation of ventilation system
and ventilation equipment, and the personnel number shall be registered in the mine book.

Article 520
Reserved Fan
1. Reserved power supply or reserved ventilation fan unit capable of circulating air during employee
evacuation at emergency situation shall be provided at the fiery underground mine operating power
activated fan
2. !f the reserved fan is provided, a weekly trial test shall be carried out.

Article 521
Booster Fan Installation
1. Booster fan shall only be installed if:
a. !nvestigation covering all areas affected by the installation has been carried out by a competent
personnel as referred to in article 372 paragraph (11)
b. Report of the investigation result has been made and the said report shall cover recommendation on
type size and location of booster fan to be installed and
c. Copy of report as referred to in letter (b) has been delivered to chief mine inspector problem may
occur due to the installation of booster fan
2. Each booster fan shall be such designed and installed that:
a. !t automatically prevents air re-circulation in mine ventilation system and
b. Air can circulate thought booster fan's inner part if the fan does not work properly
3. !f the booster fan is not attendant continuously by a competent personnel during operation it shall be
equipped with equipment enabling
a. Detect and determine methane gas content of air circulating through booster fan's inner part and
provide audio fvisual warning if the methane gas content is above 1
b. Define current rate running to each electric motor and i.e. to automatically cut off the motor current
if the motor current rate is above 10 by normal current
c. Provide visual or audio warning if:
1. Fan motor does not function properly
2. Fluctuation of ventilation pressure produced by the fan reaches 10 and
d. The warning sign as referred to in paragraph (3) shall be transmitted to a constantly attended control
room, which should be located on the mine surface
+. !f the booster fan is continuously attend, the attendant shall always monitor and take note on the
ventilation pressure every 2 hours. Any abnormalities at the operating fan shall be reported to the
supervisor
5. Construction of booster fan housing shall be fire resistant and its installation tunnel shall be made of fire
resistant material for a minimum of 10 m length at the intake airways and 50 m at the return airways
6. !f the booster fan is installed, guidelines on ventilation arrangement as referred to in article 519 shall
cover the following items
a. Safe operation system
b. Report on equipment breakdown or malfunction or significant increase of methane gas content
c. Fan shutdown at scheduled inspection and maintenance only
d. Fan shutdown only by the appointed personnel
e. Necessary measures in case of unscheduled shutdown
f. Report procedure from the in charge personnel to the chief of other mine section or the related mine
chiefs whose areas are potentially affected by the fan shutdown

Article 522
Auxiliary Ventilation System
1. Each diverge and blind stopped of more than 5 m shall be equipped with auxiliary ventilation system to
circulate air as close as possible to workface and the distance towards the hole shall not exceed 5 m
2. Company regulation on ventilation arrangement as referred to in article 519 including company regulation
on auxiliary ventilation shall include:
a. ventilation system used and minimum amount of air circulated for specified time period, both when
no body or some body is fare at the workplace.
b. ventilation equipment shall consist of:
1. All fans
2. Types of electric equipment, control equipment and cable
3. Dust collector equipment
+. Types of ducting and its installation method
5. Equipment used for reducing gas concentration in case of any gas accumulation
c. Naximum amount of air drawn from auxiliary fan's ducting
d. Continuous operation of auxiliary fan, except when under repair or maintenance
e. Naximum length of overlapping fan amount of air circulated by each fan and minimum amount of air
circulating to overlap part if using double system or overlap system
f. ventilation arrangement for measuring and recording the amount of air circulated into advanced
workplace in a 7 day interval by a competent personnel
g. Nap showing details on modification of ventilation system plan or equipment and its modification
date shall be installed at advance diverge
h. Nethod and equipment required for temporarily closing an advanced diverge and
i. Arrangement for removing gas or repairing the failure of ventilation system
3. !f some auxiliary fans are installed at one junction of intake airways calculation shall be made in advance
to ensure that all mine areas obtain adequate air circulation
+. !f auxiliary fans do not function or the amount of specified minimum air reduced it is prohibited to enter
or stay at the advanced diverge area except for the purpose pouf:
a. Re switching the auxiliary fan under supervisor of operational supervisor, or
b. Rescuing one's life in emergency situation
5. !f the auxiliary fans does not work properly the amount of circulating air is reduced so that all electric
current at advanced diverge shall be automatically cut off
6. Provisions are referred to in paragraph (5) is not applicable to the monitoring equipment and its
conducting cables, despite that methane gas content is above the given level, and it shall be installed
using electric power separated from other electric power
7. !f the electric power is cut off as referred to in paragraph (5), the electric power shall not be resumed
(turned on) until the ventilation system operates normally and inspection on advanced diverge has been
done.
8. Each auxiliary fans shall be checked during operational within + hours interval, unless:
a. An equipment is installed in advanced diverge and fans to detect:
1. Air quality and quantity
2. Nechanical and electric conditions of the fan and
3. Any fire outbreak inside or surrounding the advanced diverge circulated by ventilation air.
b. Automatic cut off electric current if methane gas content passing the fan is above 1 or if there is
any mechanicalfelectric breakdown on the fan
9. !f to fans or more are installed at the same auxiliary ventilation system or some of those fans are
installed in advance diverge workplace thus:
a. Re-measuring shall be carried out by a competent personnel to determine the right position of the
fans at intake airway for prevention of air re-circulation and leakage and
b. Re-measuring shall be carried out at the interval of each advanced diverge
10. Control switch of each auxiliary fan shall be placed at intake airways
11. Each venture ventilation operated at the mine shall be placed according to ventilation arrangement
guidelines and grounded completely the venture ventilation shall be made of fire resistant material.

Article 523
Work Environment Monitoring System
1. !n addition to the provisions as referred to in article 370 regarding the monitoring of methane gas
content on locomotive or free wheeled vehicle operation report to the chief mine inspector, and portable
and automatic methane gas detectors each fiery mine shall adhere to the additional regulation to ensure
that the following requirement can be implemented
2. !nspection on methane gas content at air flow cross section shall be carried out anytime at any work
places as referred to in article 370 paragraph (9) each long wall workplace shall be considered a part of
work areas referred to in article 370, paragraph (9) letter point (3).
3. The provisions as referred to in paragraph (2) can be carried out by using the approved detector or
transuding mine air for + working days to be analyzed at the laboratory approved by the chief mine
inspector
+. !f the methane gas content at the given location as referred to in article 370 paragraph (9) letter (b)
point (3) is:
a. Above 0.5 at intake airways or 0.8 at return airways, measurement and sampling shall be carried
out weekly and
b. Above 1.0 at return airways sampling shall be carried out daily
5. Continuous monitoring system shall be installed to detect or measure methane gas or other gases as
records for periodical sampling at:
a. Location of transducer that shall be defined as measurement location
b. Time calculated when the sample entering a transducer shall be defined as sampling time
c. All recorded gas-sampling result.
6. At highly combustible coal seam, early heat detector shall be installed at location specified by Kepala
Teknik Tambang or directed by the Nine !nspector. !f the sampling is periodically determined, it shall be
carried out in one-week interval.
7. Each mine shall be equipped with barometer at a location easily readable by the mine supervisor when
entering the mine. Barometer equipped with the continuous air pressure recorder shall also be provided
at the mine surface.
8. All monitoring result specified herein shall be recorded, reported and kept as referred to in article 16.

Article 524
Monitoring of Methane Gas Content on Locomotive or Steered Vehicle Operation
1. !f locomotive or steered vehicle is operated at a fiery mine, measurement of methane gas content shall
use an approved detector or air sample as referred to in article 523, paragraph (3).
2. The methane gas content shall be measured at:
a. Each mine road end passed by locomotive or other vehicles and
b. Other given places
3. For sampling the mine inspector may determine the mine location in writing
+. Neasurement of methane gas content shall be carried out once in a week at each location as referred to
in paragraphs (1) and (2) if there is an increase in gas content so that:
a. !f the measurement taken at place shows the gas content is above 0.8 the measurement shall be
carried out within 2+ hours interval as long as the percentage of gas content still indicates higher, the
measurement shall be carried out in 7 consecutive Days and
b. !f each measurement conducted for 30 days at that indicates that methane gas content is not more
than:
1. 0.2 along intake airways and
2. 0.6 along any other ways
Therefore, measurement at that place can be sufficiently carried out within 30 days interval as long
as no gas content exceed the above percentage.
5. Although all provisions as referred to in paragraph (+) fulfilled, if there is any changes in mine ventilation
arrangement that will affect length of the road where methane gas content is determined in accordance
with this article the determination of methane gas content at those places shall be immediately carried
out.
6. !f the measurement of methane gas content are recorded as referred to in this article by taking air
samples, the measurement shall be carried out at the place where and time when the sample is taken
7. Each measurement of methane gas specifically conducted in accordance with this article shall be
recorded instantly as referred to in article 502
8. !f the measurements of methane gas content conducted in several places along the road (not the
measurement with air sample analysis) exceeds 1 by volume or the flammable gas indicates a declining
flame on the safety lamp at air cross section, personnel responsible for the mine area. Thereafter the
personnel in charge shall stop the operation of locomotive or steered vehicle at that road, and it can be
re operated if the methane gas content is less than 1 by volume, and approved by the Kepala Tambang
Bawah Tanah
9. !f the measurement of methane gas content is conducted by analyzing air samples and the methane gas
content is above 1 by volume, provisions in paragraph 8 shall be applied.

Article 525
Notification to The Chief Mine Inspector
1. Other than the provisions referred to in article 523 and 52+, Kepala Teknik Tambang shall immediately
notify the mine inspector if:
a. Nethane gas content is above 1 at return airways and at a distance of 50 m from long wall
workplace
b. Nethane gas content is above 0.5 at intake airways and at a distance of 50 m from long wall
workplace
c. Locomotive or other remote controlled vehicle operation is stopped because methane gas content is
above 1 by volume as referred to article 52+ paragraph (8) or (9) and
d. Effective temperature exceeds 30 degree C
2. The notification referred to in paragraph (1), shall mention maximum methane gas content or detected
temperature, and condition period and their causes in detail. Actions to rectify the ventilation condition
shall also be included.

Article 526
Portable Methane Gas Detector
1. Other than the provisions referred to in article 502 paragraph (3) the flame safety lamp or portable
methane gas detector shall be provided along with a number of trained personnel capable of using the
equipment
2. Guidelines on ventilation system stipulated by the company shall cover quantity and location of methane
gas detector !, e;
a. At long wall workplace or natural support workplace one detector for each group of 8 workers shall
be provided during the shift
b. At least one detector shall be provided at other places including tunnel or advance diverge of non
coal seam
c. At least one detector shall be provided at each return airway if repair work is being carried out and at
a distance of 90 m from workplace operating electric equipment and
d. At least one detector shall be provided at workface operating electric equipment at a distance of 90
m from return airway.
3. !nspection shall be performed at the beginning of each shift and while entering the mine area after
blasting
+. Refreshing training referred to in article 502, paragraph (3) letter (d) shall also cover hazard related to
flame safety lamp, and particularly on re-switching it in the fiery area.

Article 527
Automatic Methane Gas Detector
1. Automatic methane gas detector shall be adequately provided so that the following provisions hereof can
be fulfilled:
a. Workface
!f two consecutive measurement at a distance of 50 m along the return airways from each long wall
workface or natural support room indicate methane gas content of above 0.5 automatic methane
gas detector shall be installed at:
1. The end of return airways from workface or at the natural support room
2. Cutting and loading machine or excavating and loading machine operated at coal seam
3. Each removal activities of natural support
b. Automatic methane gas detector shall be provided at advance diverge of return of return airways if
two consecutive measurement indicate methane gas content of above 0.5 and
c. At the end of return airways usually containing methane gas of above 0.5 automatic methane gas
detector shall be installed at each:
1. Permanent electric motor at the airways and
2. Locomotive or steered vehicle operating on that road
2. Each automatic methane gas detector as referred to in paragraph (1) shall be installed in compliance with
the provisions issued by Kepala Teknik Tambang or guidelines of mine inspector
3. Each automatic methane gas detector installed at coal mining equipment or unattended electric motor
shall be arranged in such a way that electric current will automatically out off if methane gas content
reaches 1.
+. The available methane gas detector in compliance with the provisions hereof, or that requested by the
Kepala Teknik Tambang shall be considered a portable detector as referred to in article 526. !n this case
no more than 2 automatic methane gas detectors at long wall workface or at natural supported room
shall be allowed
5. !f the requirement of explosive gas detector has been fulfilled by automatic detector the equipments of
oxygen deficiency detector shall be separately taken into account for and provided by Kepala Teknik
Tambang
6. !f the methane gas content at the end of return airways is above 0.5 the chief mine inspector shall
suggest to provide methane gas detector for performing continuous monitoring the data and
measurement result shall be possibly monitored on the surface.

Article 52S
Leakage Control
1. Other than provisions as referred to in article 375, each section connecting intake and return airways that
are not used for mining activities shall be closed based on method approved by the chief mine inspector
2. Airway towards abandoned workplaces shall be closed based on the method approved by the chief mine
inspector and equipped with air sampling facility
3. Air pass shall be installed at junction of fresh and polluted air passage so that no air is mixing
+. Entrance doors available for the main intake and return airways shall be of fire resistant construction and
all air junctions air lock and curtain wall as referred to here of be of explosion resistant construction.

Article 529
General Tasks
Any mine having methane gas drainage system shall be provided with equipment in compliance with the
methane gas drainage requirements and the drainage guidelines and shall appoint competent operational
supervisors to supervise the following provisions.
Article 530
Bore Hole and Drainage Pipe
1. Before drilling a bore hole for draining methane gas pipes to be used for flowing, methane gas leaving
the bore hole towards a safe area shall be provided
2. The drilling as referred to paragraph (1) shall be equipment that can plug the bore hole in case of sudden
methane gas inrush
3. Prior to starting the drilling as referred to paragraph (1), the drill operator shall ensure that water will
flow thought the drill rod, and the water will flow out thought the opening of bore hole
+. Each bore hole shall be equipped with a gauge that can measure the explosive gas content continuously
5. Each stand pipe consisting a part of methane gas drainage system shall be put into the bore hole and its
surrounding shall be plugged tightly
6. !t is prohibited to connect flowing pipe to pipeline system, unless using flexible hose.

Article 531
Pipelines and Valves
1. Pipe or pipeline system of methane gas drainage shall not be installed in the shaft or exit way
constituting the intake airway to mine area
2. Each pipeline installed for methane gas drainage system shall be:
a. Designed in such a way that methane gas sample can be taken and drained out of the pipe.
b. !nstalled sturdily and
c. Narked with yellow paint near the joints
3. Each joint at pipelines shall be air tight to prevent outside air from being suctioned into the gas methane
flowing pipelines
+. Each valve on methane gas drainage system shall be painted yellow.

Article 532
Methane Gas Suction Pump
1. Nethane gas suction pump installed in the methane gas drainage system shall be:
a. Of the approved function and type
b. Able to prevent methane gas re-circulation when the suction pump does not work properly and
c. Arranged so that when suction pump does not work the methane gas can flow freely
2. Nethane gas suction pump shall be grounded

Article 533
On fined Building for Methane Gas Suction Pump and Calorimeter
1. Suction pump shall be placed in a confined building on the surface
2. Electric equipment installed at the building for explosive gas suction pump or calorimeter room shall be
made of flame proof material and it shall be approved
3. Lamps Operated at compartment of suction pump or calorimeter room shall be flame proof
+. Calorimeter or monitoring device used at methane gas drainage system shall be placed in the confined
compartment and separately ventilated from calorimeter room.
5. !t is prohibited to open the compartment as referred to in paragraph (+) in the calorimeter room, unless
it has been ensured that the calorimeter room is in safe condition

Article 534
Methane Gas Disposal
1. Location of methane gas disposal shall be secured to prevent any possibilities of accidental ignition
2. The end part of methane gas disposal pipe shall be equipped with fire trap to prevent fire from spreading
into the drainage system
3. !t is prohibited to dispose methane gas from a drainage system into a utilization plant if the methane gas
content is less than +0
+. !t is prohibited to dispose methane gas at location close to the mine intake airways
5. !t is prohibited to dispose methane gas out of the drainage system in an underground mine.

Article 535
Suction Plug Supervision
Competent personnel shall conduct the supervision of methane gas drainage including suction pump and air
pressure control room

Article 536
Venture Suction Pump
venture suction pump used at the methane gas drainage system shall be made of any metal other than
aluminum or magnesium.

Section Four
Work Place Support

Article 537
Application
Other than the provisions as referred to in article 3+6 to 365; the following provisions shall be applied to all
underground coalmines.

Article 53S
Systematic Support
1. Systematic support shall be constructed to support roof and wall of:
a. Each work face
b. Each advanced diverge
c. Each junction of two or three tunnels if there is any vehicle or conveyor belt passing any of the said
tunnels and
d. Each tunnel where there is anyone working
2. Nine inspector can instruct in writing to the chief mine inspector in issuing provisions on Systematic
Support on certain places or road sections of mine areas other than the provisions as referred to in
paragraph (1) and
3. The Chief Nine !nspector shall be allowed to enforce the provisions on Systematic Support to other mines
in addition to underground coalmines.
+. !t is prohibited to prevent anyone from installing additional support on any existing support systems if it
is required for safety reason.
5. Nine workers shall be obligated to install any additional supports in their work areas in accordance with
their operational supervisor's directive.

Article 539
Company Regulation on Supporting
1. Other than the provisions referred to in Article 361, any personnel responsible for installing and removing
the supports or supervising the said work shall have a copy of the Company regulation on supporting.
2. !n case that the mineworkers encounter any language difficulty or are illiterate, the supervisor shall give
oral directive or instruction.
3. Copies of prevailing Company regulation on supporting shall be kept in mine office or other places
approved or determined by the Nine !nspector.
+. The Nine !nspector can amend in writing, any Company regulation on supporting in the Nining Book.

Article 540
Guidelines on Support at Special Conditions
1. Company regulation on supporting for roads constituting 2 parts of mining activities for room and pillar
natural support or diverge of longfshort wall shall contain the detail on sequence of installation, advanced
diverge and maximum distance:
a. Between the last row and surface of advanced diverge not more than 1.0 meter;
b. Each supporting row or rock bolt or any other support types not more than 1.25 meter;
c. Rock bolt's prop set or any other support types along with the adjacent support not more than 1.25
meter;
d. Arc support or prop set not more than 1.25 meter; and
e. Cubicle support not more than 1.50 meter.
2. Company regulation on supporting to longfshort wall mining system shall cover the support on the whole
length and width of all workforces and determine the support removal method. The maximum distance of
support is as follows:
a. One prop set row to another shall not be more than 1 meter;
b. Adjacent prop set in the same row shall not be more than 1.25 meter; and
c. The front prop set row and workface shall be as close as practicable possible.
3. Each bar shall be supported by at least 2 prop sets.
a. !f a chained box approved by the Chief Nine !nspector will be installed:
1) Each bar shall be supported with one prop set and
2) The very front bar can be temporarily unsupported
b. !f the Company regulation on supporting allows the use of slide bar, it shall be supported by at least
2 prop sets and
c. The slide bar end at the very front row shall be as close as possible to a workface.
+. Support for the operation of Cutting Nachine. On each area operating coal cutter for cutting the coal of
more than 0.+ meter wide for each cutting, the prop set shall be installed immediately at any opening.
The installation of the support shall follow the provisions as referred to in paragraph (2).
5. Company regulation on supporting for powered-roof support.
a. Each powered-roof support installed in the mine shall be approved by the Chief Nine !nspector;
b. Company regulation on powered-roof support shall provide details on maximum interval of one
powered-roof support to another. The interval shall comply with the manufacturer's specification;
c. !f any places using coal cutting machine which enables to cut more than 0.+ meter thick, powered-
roof support shall be advanced immediately after an opening is made and
d. No one is allowed to stand between flexible conveyor chain and workface while the coal cutter is
operating or powered-roof support is advanced.
6. Company regulation on supporting in the cutting work of tunnel's roof rock shall cover:
a. Safety by installing sturdy support as close as possible to the roof to be repaired;
b. Phases of any repair support installation shall be done immediately and it shall support up to the top;
c. !f the roof repair work is to enlarge road dimension, each roof cutting work shall be stopped, and the
workface being cut shall be supported;
d. Specification of the roof's maximum length allowed during repair work.
7. Company regulation on supporting shall cover maximum allowable distance between workface and the
last row support.
8. Temporary prop set.
a. !f, at any time, there is anyone working between the flexible conveyor chain and workface, and the
distance between the workface and the very front row is more than 1 meter, the work place shall be
temporarily bar-supported. !f the approved powered roof support in used, at least one slide bar shall
be installed at every 1 meter interval;
b. !n excavation area other than long wall opening or where the work does not involve roof cutting, the
support guidelines shall cover support specifications in compliance with the excavation. !f the
relevant support system uses prop set and slide bar, the provisions on Support Guidelines shall cover
installation of temporary slide bar in a distance of less than 1.0 meter in front of the last installed
prop set and the distance between one prop set to another shall not exceed 1.25 meter;
1) For coal excavation in the workface, the distance of temporary prop set row shall not exceed one
meter from the very front prop set and the distance from each prop set row to its sides row shall
not exceed the distance of each installed support row of the very front row and;
2) !f coal is excavated at the buttock part, the temporary prop set shall be installed in a distance of
not more than 1.0 meter, measured parallel with excavation line from the last prop set of the
installed prop set row, or the last temporary prop set in accordance with the situation.
c. !n coal excavation area other than long wall workface or roof cutting, the support guidelines shall
cover support provisions in compliance with the excavation. !f the above relevant support system
uses prop set and slide bar, the specification shall cover temporary installation of slide bar in a
distance of less than 1.0 meter in front of the last installed prop set and the distance between one
prop set to another shall not exceed than 1.25 meter;
9. Arc support and prop set on road head. !f the roof and wall support system on road head surface are
installed using arc support or prop set, the support guidelines shall cover the detail on maximum distance
of each support not exceeding 1.25 meter.
10. Rock Bolt.
a. Rock bolt shall not be used as the only support at long wall workface, except for the purpose of
removing powered-roof support; and
b. !f roof bolt is used as support, the support guidelines shall cover design, interval, and torque force
applied. The use of roof bolt shall comply with the provision as referred to in article 353.
11. The use of wire mesh to control the major movement of roof rock's top layer, the support guidelines shall
cover:
a. Naximum distance between workface and front face of wire mesh standing on the opposite to
workface;
b. Ninimum width of wire mesh;
c. Naximum interval between one wire mesh to another.

Article 541
Duties of Company Regulation on Supporting
1. An operational Supervisor or capable appointed to be responsible for the specified work area where
support are installed, advance the personnel in charge of the company regulation on advancement and
removal shall ensure that the company regulation on supporting is implemented he shall also ensure that
if there is a condition requiring some additional support, they shall be installed immediately. Although the
said meter is excluded in the company regulation on the supporting
2. Other than provisions referred to in article 32 paragraph (3) and article 350, any personnel in the mine
related to excavation and support installation works, including ripping or tunnel repair shall ensure that
the requirement regulated in the company regulation on supporting are fulfilled and the required
additional support are installed
3. Unsafe traffic tunnel or other mine section as referred to in the company regulation on supporting shall
only be entered by personnel authorized to regulation on supporting shall only be entered by personnel
authorized to perform inspection or repair.

Article 542
Provisions for Tunnel with Special Conditions
!n every mine where rocks gradient is +0 degrees step or steeper, a part of coal layer shall be left on the roof
the specification shall be contained in the company regulation on supporting.

Article 543
General Provisions on Support Installation
1 Prop Set
a. Anyone installing prop set for roof or wall support shall install it sturdily on a strong base
b. !f a personnel in charge of installing prop set notices broken damaged, and unstable prop set
c. !f the personnel fails to comply with the provisions as referred to in paragraph (1) letters (a) and (b),
he shall immediately report is to the supervisor in charge of the support
2 Header
a. Anyone installing prop set shall insert a suitable and sufficiently thick header between the prop set
and slide bar or roof to completely cover the top part of the prop set, and if a slide bar is not installed
on top of the prop set the header's width shall not be less than the top size of the prop set and its
length shall at least double the top part of the prop set and
b. No header is necessarily installed between the prop set and slide bar if:
i. !t is installed beneath a timber slide bar
ii. The installed prop set is equipped with friction cap which functions to hold the slide bar remain
of the prop set
iii. Prop set is installed to break the roof rocks and
iv. Netal prop set and support installed at places other than workplace
3. Power- Roof support installation:
a. Personnel in charge of installing powered roof support shall ensure that each support has been
securely installed. !f the personnel finds any damaged powered roof support, he shall report it to the
supervisor in charge of the support and
b. The supervisor in charge of the support shall ensure that any damaged powered roof support has
been repaired or replaced and the roof has been properly supported
+. !nstallation of rock bolt shall comply with the provisions as referred to in article 353
5. Crib
a. Crib shall be installed in a strong base and extend to the roof rocks and
b. Crib shall be made of flat surface block
6. !f a wire mesh is used as a part of a support system, the wire mesh shall be made and installed in such a
way that it the reaches the roof rocks and if the wire mesh is made manually, it shall be made on a
sturdy base and filled with debris
7. Arc and Rectangular Supports. Each arc and rectangular support installed for roof or wall support shall be
installed in a sturdy base and between the support, shall be provided with bar, rigidly tied to the support

Article 544
Installation of Substitute Support
1. Personnel of supporting shall ensure that damaged or ineffective support shall be immediately replaced
with the new one, and the unstable one shall be stabilized
2. Personnel identifying any damaged support shall immediately repair it, when possible or report it to
operational supervisor
3. !f there is any collapsed roof, or displacement, or broken walls or ineffective support in mine area of
traffic and work place, the person on duty shall ensure that:
a. The open roof or wall areas adjacent to the opened section shall be immediately supported
b. The areas shall be secured prior to clearing any debris and
c. !n case that the personnel on duty referred to in letters (a) and (b) fails to perform any activities as
referred to in this paragraph, the personnel shall ensure that there is not anyone crossing by or
working at the place except upon directive of underground operational supervisor

Article 545
Support Removal
!t is prohibited to remove support on any mine section unless the work is performed from a safe position

Article 546
Delay of the support Installation or Removal
1. Delay of the support installation or removal shall only be done in the following conditions:
i. To ensure no disturbance in advancing, deflecting or making space for the coal cutting machine or
loading 8 hauling machine, it is allowable to delay the support installation or removing
ii. !f the operation of coal cutting machine is disturbed by any slide bar on the roof the slide bar can be
removed
2. Delay of support installation or removal shall only be performed for a short period
3. Other than the provisions as referred to in paragraph (1) letter a, the provisions shall cover continuous
prop set using a single slide bar with a length of above the distance of 2 prop sets, or if the distance is
less than 2.0 m, the joint slide bar can be used
+. Each single slide bar shall be supported by at least one prop set on either end and each joint slide bar
shall be supported by at least one prop set

Article 547
Powered Roof Support Installation or Removal
1. Each mine using powered roof support shall be provided with a drawing support installation, removal and
transportation
2. The drawing of powered roof support installation shall cover:
a. Transportation method from the surface to workface which is and be specifically emphasized on
handing and transportation safety
b. Provisions on relevant transfer vehicle including special types where necessary
c. Provisions on relevant drawing which is equipped with tensile load limit indicator
d. Provisions on transport vehicle designed with sufficient size and sturdiness
e. Nethod of supporting workface during powered roof support installation
3. !nstallation and removal scheme of powered roof support shall cover:
a. Nethod of supporting worksite during the removal of powered roof support
b. Nethod of transporting powered roof support from one worksite to another
c. The same provisions as referred to in paragraph (2) letter (b) to (d).

Article 54S
Requirements on Canopy or Cabin of Free-steered Vehicle
Free-steered vehicles operating around coal mine shall be equipped with canopy or cabin capable of
protecting the operator against any falling objects.

Section Five
Training and Supervision for Underground Mine Workers

Article 549
General Implementation
Provision as referred to in articles 28 to 30, +7+ to +82, and +90 shall be applicable to all underground
mining.

Article 550
Mine Workers Training
1. Nine workers allowed to work in underground mining work shall be:
a. Workers having obtained training, declared capable and holding a certificate and
b. Worker who is attending training.
2. The training provided to mine workers shall be relevant to the curriculum approved by the Chief Nine
!nspector and cover:
a. Basic training for coal excavation work shall be carried out at the minimum of 90 days and closely
supervised by instructor or mine supervisor; and
b. Advanced training on coal excavation work shall be carried out at the minimum of 30 days after
receiving basic training and closely supervised by instructor or mine supervisor.
3. The Chief Nine !nspector shall ensure that:
a. One supervisor is assigned to supervise only one participant of basic training and one instructor
should provide training only for one type of activity; and
b. !f an area is at certain time, fully used for training purpose, the work at the area shall be suspended.

Article 551
Coal Cutting Machine
Nine workers who are able to operate mechanical, hydraulic, or electric coal cutting machine, excluding
portable machine, in underground mining shall fulfill the following requirements:
a. Having obtained training as referred to in article 550 paragraph (1);
b. Experienced in excavation work for at least 6 months;
c. Having obtained training in operating the same type of coal cutting machine; and
d. Having been declared capable of operating coal cutting machine.

CHAPTER X
SANCTION

Article 552
Any violations against this Ninisterial Decree shall be subjected to a sanction as referred to in article 33 of
Law No. 11 of 1967 regarding Basic Principles of on Nining.

CHAPTER XI
TRANSITIONAL PROVISIONS

Article 553
The mining company shall be responsible for applying the provision on qualification of Kepala Teknik
Tambang as Referred to in the decree of The Ninister within no longer than 2 (two) years as of the
stipulation hereof.

CHAPTER XII
CLOSING

Article 554
1. By the effectiveness of this Decree, all regulations governing occupational health and safety on general
mines as long as already regulated herein shall be declared null and void.
2. The Director General shall regulate any further provisions required for the implementation here of.

Article 555
This Ninisterial Decree shall become effective as of the date of stipulation.

Stipulated in: Jakarta
On: 22 Nay 1995
THE N!N!STER OF N!NES AND ENERGY
(Signed)
H.B. SUDJANA